2007 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M - Dealer...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 42Airbag System ........................................ 68Restraint System Check ......................... 86

Features and Controls ................................. 89Keys ....................................................... 91Doors and Locks .................................... 96Windows ............................................... 103Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 107Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 111Mirrors .................................................. 132OnStar® System ................................... 137Universal Home Remote System .......... 139Storage Areas ...................................... 151Sunroof ................................................ 153

Instrument Panel ........................................ 155Instrument Panel Overview ................... 158Climate Controls ................................... 180Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 188Message Center ................................... 209Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 218Audio System(s) ................................... 258

Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 287Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ...................................... 288Towing ................................................. 326

Service and Appearance Care ................... 329Service ................................................. 332Fuel ...................................................... 334Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 340Rear Axle ............................................. 383Headlamp Aiming ................................. 384Bulb Replacement ................................ 387

2007 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

1Information Provided by:

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 390Tires ..................................................... 392Appearance Care .................................. 435Vehicle Identification ............................. 445Electrical System .................................. 446Capacities and Specifications ................ 457

Maintenance Schedule ............................... 459Maintenance Schedule .......................... 460

Customer Assistance Information ............. 481Customer Assistance and Information ..... 482Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 500

Index ........................................................... 503


GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath,and the name CTS are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without notice.For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may notbe equipped with all of them. For example,more than one entertainment system may beoffered or your vehicle may have been orderedwithout a front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864562 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.


How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then we tell you what to do to help avoidor reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”


Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5


These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:


Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 10Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 14Head Restraints .......................................... 17

Rear Seats .................................................... 18Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 18

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26Driver Position ............................................. 26Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 33Right Front Passenger Position ................... 34Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 34Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 38Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 41Safety Belt Extender ................................... 41

Child Restraints ............................................ 42Older Children ............................................. 42Infants and Young Children ......................... 45

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 55Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 63Airbag System .............................................. 68

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 76How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 76What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 77Passenger Sensing System ......................... 79Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 84Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 85Restraint System Check ............................... 86

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 86Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 87

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems


Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Your vehicle may have manual seats. To adjustthe seat, lift the bar under the front of theseat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you wantit and release the bar. Try to move the seatback and forth with your body to be sure the seatis locked in place.


Power Seats

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire horizontal control up or down.

The vertical control is used for reclining yourseatback. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 14 for moreinformation.


Power Lumbar

Your vehicle may havethis feature. The driver’sand passenger’sseatback lumbar supportcan be adjusted bymoving the controllocated on the outboardside of the seatcushions.

To increase or decrease support, hold the controlforward or rearward. Keep in mind that as yourseating position changes, as it may duringlong trips, so should the position of your lumbarsupport. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated Seats

If your vehicle hasheated front seats, thebuttons are locatedon the climatecontrol panel.

There is one button for the driver and one for thefront passenger. Each button has three settings,LO, HI and off. The active setting appears onthe climate control panel display. The LO settingwarms the seatback and cushion until the seatapproximates normal body temperature. TheHI setting has a slightly higher temperature.


To turn on the heated seats, press the buttononce. The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press thebutton again to switch to the LO setting. Pressingthe button a third time turns the system off.

The heated seats can only be used when theignition is turned on. When the vehicle is turnedoff, the heated seats automatically turn off. Ifyou wish to have the heated seats on once thevehicle is restarted, press the button again.

Memory Seat and MirrorsIf your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for the driver’sseating and outside rearview mirror drivingpositions. Different adjustments can beprogrammed for two drivers.

The buttons for thisfeature are located onthe driver’s doorarmrest.

Use the following steps to program the buttons:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatbackrecliner and both outside mirrors.

2. Press and hold button 1 for at leastthree seconds.Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seatand mirror positions have been saved.

3. Repeat the procedure for a second driverusing button 2.


If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thevehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the storeddriving positions.

If your vehicle has a manual transmission and theengine is running, the parking brake must beset to recall the memory seat driving positions. Thestored driving positions can be recalled withoutsetting the parking brake if the vehicle is off.

Press one of the numbered memory buttons torecall the stored setting. Each time a memorybutton is pressed, a single beep will sound.

Three chimes will sound and the setting will notbe recalled if you press button 1 or 2 whenthe vehicle is not in PARK (P) on an automatictransmission or the parking brake is not set on amanual transission.

If you would like the stored driving positions to berecalled when unlocking your vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry transmitter or after the keyis placed in the ignition, see DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 239.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat or mirrorcontrols.

Two personalized exit positions can also beprogrammed. Use the following steps to programexit positions:

1. Press memory seat button 1 or the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter, that has thenumber 1 on the back of it, to recall the drivingposition.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exitposition.


3. Press and hold the exit button located abovebuttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrestfor at least three seconds.Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exitposition has been saved.

4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver usingmemory seat button 2 or the RKE transmitter,that has the number 2 on the back of it.

To recall the stored exit positions, press andrelease the exit button. One beep will sound, andthe seat will move to the stored exit positionfor that driver. If an exit position has not beenstored for this driver, the seat will move all the wayback. The position of the outside mirrors doesnot change for the exit position.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thevehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exitpositions. If your vehicle has a manual transmissionand the engine is running, the parking brake mustbe set to recall the stored exit positions.

Three chimes will sound and the exit setting willnot be recalled if you press the exit buttonwhen the vehicle is not in PARK (P) on anautomatic transmission or the parking brake is notset on a manual transmission.

If you would like your stored exit position to berecalled when unlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter, or when the ignition is turned offand the driver’s door is opened, see DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 239.


Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:


If your front passenger’s seat has a manualreclining seatback, the lever used to operate it islocated on the outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.


To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If your seats have power reclining seatbacks, usethe vertical power seat control located on theoutboard side of each seat.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the controltoward the front of the vehicle.


{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.


Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the occupant’shead. This position reduces the chance of aneck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top of theseatback, and pushthe head restraint down.

All the head restraints can tilt forward andrearward.

The rear head restraints can be removed from theseatback. To do this, press the button, locatedon the top of the seatback, and pull the headrestraint all the way out.


Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatYour vehicle may have a split folding rear seat.A split folding rear seat allows you to carrylong cargo by folding down part or all of therear seat.

Use the following steps to lower one or both of therear seatbacks:

1. Your vehicle mayhave a detachableanchor on thecenter safety belt.Insert a toolwith a small tip intothe slot as shownto unlatch the safetybelt buckle. Thenmove the belt to theside so it is not inyour way.

2. There is a tablocated on theoutboard sides ofthe seatback.Pull forward on thetab to unlock theseatback.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

3. Fold the seatback down. This will allow youdirect access to the trunk.


To return the seatback to the upright position,do the following:

{CAUTION:


1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted willnot provide the protection needed in acrash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raising the

CAUTION: (Continued)


rear seatback, always check to be surethat the safety belts are properly routedand attached, and are not twisted.

2. Reconnect thecenter safetybelt latch plate tothe buckle.

3. Make sure the seatback is locked into placeby pushing and pulling on it.

4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.

When the seatback is not in use, it should bekept in the upright, locked position.


Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.


{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has alight that comes onas a reminder tobuckle up. See SafetyBelt Reminder Lighton page 192.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts.Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will bea bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!


Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.


Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...


or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.


Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down.And your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why shouldI have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will bein most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they workwith safety belts — not instead of them.Every airbag system ever offered for salehas required the use of safety belts. Even ifyou are in a vehicle that has airbags, you stillhave to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of lessthan 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.


How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 45. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.


The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.


The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of theretractor.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.



A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.



A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have the fullwidth of the belt to spread impact forces. Ifa belt is twisted, make it straight so it canwork properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. The belt should go back out of the way.


Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.


Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tiltthe latch plate and keep pulling until you canbuckle the belt.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,tilt the latch plate and keep pulling untilyou can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.


The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly outof the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.


Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.


2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then, placethe guide over the belt and insert the two edgesof the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.


{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 34. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.


Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are located on the buckleend of the safety belts. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 87.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 38. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint the belts provide.


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.


Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.


{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.


{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.


Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.


{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.


A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.


A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.


Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installedin the vehicle using the vehicle’s safetybelt or LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, thechild restraint must be secured in the vehicle.Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55 for more information.A child can be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.


Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. In the United States, some childrestraints also have a top tether. Be sure to readand follow the instructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for many childrestraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Rear Seat


To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease between theseatback and the seatcushion, showing wherethe anchors are located.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe trim cover.

The top tether anchors are located under thetrim covers on the rear seatback filler panel.Be sure to use an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 54 for additional information.


Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.


{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.


2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover

to open the cover and expose theanchor.

2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,raise the head restraint.

2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.


If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came withthe child restraint. Secure the child in the childrestraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.


3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.


5. If your child restraint has a top tether,attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and tostep five under Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 55.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 54.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 79 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 194for more information on this including importantsafety information.


A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger’s position.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8 or Power Seats on page 9.


If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seatin this position if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be anchored.See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55 if your child restraint hasa top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 79. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8 or Power Seats on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to ON or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 194.


2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulderbelt while you push down on the childrestraint. You may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.


7. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in therearview mirror will be lit and stay lit whenthe key is turned to ON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.


A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers heaters or massagers, located between theseat cushion and the child restraint or smalloccupant, can affect how the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling/securingthe child restraint or small occupant.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has six airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver and anotherfrontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and another for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and passenger directly behind the driver.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of an inflatingairbag. But these airbags must inflate very quicklyto do their job and comply with federal regulations.


Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed to



inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags androof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.


{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you are too close to an inflatingairbag, as you would be if you were leaningforward, it could seriously injure you.Safety belts help keep you in position forairbag inflation before and during a crash.Always wear your safety belt even withfrontal airbags. The driver should sit as farback as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle. Occupants shouldnot lean on or sleep against the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 45.


There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 192 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.


The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The driver’s seat-mounted side impact airbag is inthe side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.


The right front passenger’s seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the passenger directly behind the driver isin the ceiling above the side windows.


The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the frontpassenger and the passenger directly behindthe front passenger is in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie-down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating airbag will be blocked.Do not let seat covers block the inflationpath of a side impact airbag. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.


When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronicfrontal sensor, which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severefrontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about 12 to16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level fora full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to38.5 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,with specific vehicle design, so that it can besomewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.


Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

The side impact airbags are intended to inflatein moderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers,or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intendedto deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, theangle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts.For side impact airbags, inflation is determined bythe location and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel, instrument panel, the side of thefront seatbacks closest to the door, and the ceilingof the vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.The airbag supplements the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.


But the frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for side impact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize the airbagsinflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to deflate more slowly and may stillbe partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag, the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, the side of the seatbackclosest to the door for seat-mounted side impactairbags, and the area along the ceiling of yourvehicle near the side windows for roof-mountedside impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.


The parts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on whenthe airbags inflate and turn on the hazard warningflashers. You can lock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers onby using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 494.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.


Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when youturn your ignition key to ON or START. The wordsON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, willbe visible on the rearview mirror during the systemcheck. When the system check is complete,either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbolfor on or the symbol for off will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 194.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

United States

Canada



{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.


The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• There is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorin the rearview mirror will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 194.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 63.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properlyin the right front passenger’s seat. When the


passenger sensing system has allowed the airbagto be enabled, the on indicator will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.


{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 192 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling orsecuring the child restraint or small occupant.You may want to consider not using seat coversor other aftermarket equipment if your vehiclehas the passenger sensing system. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 85 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.


Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 501.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the airbag system. Besure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.


Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, frontend or side sheet metal or height, they maykeep the airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not workproperly if you relocate any of the airbagsensors. If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 482.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, the inside rearviewmirror, steering wheel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system.If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 482.


Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 439 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback, or the sideimpact airbag covering on the ceiling near theside windows, the bag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, the airbag moduleand seatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,or side impact airbag module and ceilingcovering for the roof-mounted side impactairbag. Do not open or break the airbagcoverings.


Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new buckle assembly will be there tohelp protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt buckleassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt buckle assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 192.


✍ NOTES


Keys .............................................................. 91Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 92Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .... 93

Doors and Locks .......................................... 96Door Locks ................................................. 96Central Door Unlocking System ................... 97Power Door Locks ....................................... 97Delayed Locking .......................................... 98Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 98Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 99Lockout Protection ..................................... 100Trunk ........................................................ 100

Windows ...................................................... 103Power Windows ........................................ 104Sun Visors ................................................ 106

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 107Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 107Immobilizer ................................................ 109Immobilizer Operation ................................ 109

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 111New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 111Ignition Positions ....................................... 112Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 114

Starting the Engine .................................... 114Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 116Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 118Manual Transmission Operation ................. 122Parking Brake ........................................... 124Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 126Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 128Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transmission) ........................... 128Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 129Engine Exhaust ......................................... 130Running the Engine While Parked ............. 131

Mirrors ......................................................... 132Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 132Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 133Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 135Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 136Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 137Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 137

Section 2 Features and Controls


OnStar® System .......................................... 137Universal Home Remote System ................ 139

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 139

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 140

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 141

Universal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 147

Storage Areas ............................................. 151Glove Box ................................................. 151Cupholder(s) .............................................. 151Center Console Storage

Area (CTS Only) .................................... 151Map Pocket ............................................... 151Roof Rack ................................................. 152Convenience Net ....................................... 152

Sunroof ....................................................... 153

Section 2 Features and Controls


Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.


One key works all of thelock cylinders on thevehicle.

Your vehicle has an Immobilizer VehicleTheft-Deterrent System. The key has atransponder in the key head that matches adecoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If areplacement key or any additional key is needed,you must purchase it from your dealer. Thekey will have PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the barcode tag that came with the original keys. Give thistag to your dealer if you need a new key made.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Cadillac RoadsideService®. See Roadside Service on page 488.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any remote keyless entrysystem. If the transmitter does not work or if youhave to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 93.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationWith this feature, you can lock and unlock thedoors or the trunk and turn on your vehicle’sinterior lamps from about 10 feet (3 m) away usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmittersupplied with your vehicle.

Q (Lock): Press thissymbol on the RKEtransmitter to lock thedoors. This alsoarms the theft-deterrentsystem.

You can program your vehicle so that the exteriorlamps will flash and/or the horn will soundwhen you lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 239for more information on programming this feature.


W (Unlock): Press this symbol on the RKEtransmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This alsodisarms the theft-deterrent system. Press thebutton again to unlock the other doors.

You can program your vehicle so that the exteriorlamps will flash when you unlock the doorswith the RKE transmitter. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 239 for more informationon programming this feature.

L (Panic Alarm): The RKE transmitter has aninstant panic alarm. Press this button whenthe ignition is turned off. The horn will sound andthe exterior lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.To stop the instant panic alarm, press thisbutton again or turn the ignition to ON.

V (Trunk): Press and hold this button forapproximately one second to open the trunk.

The RKE transmitter can be used to recallthe memory settings for up to two drivers. Formore information, see DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 239 and Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 11.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your dealer. When the dealer matchesthe replacement transmitter to your vehicle,any remaining transmitters must also be matched.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.


Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

1. Use a flat thin object to pry open thetransmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object.

3. Insert the new battery as the instructionsunder the cover indicate.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether. Make sure the cover is on tightly, sowater will not get in.

5. Press any button on the RKE transmitter toresynchronize the transmitter.

6. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrentsystem, you must unlock the doors from theoutside with the key or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.If the windows are down and the doors are locked,do not reach in to manually unlock the vehiclebecause you will set off the alarm.


From the inside, use themanual lock leverslocated on the doorpanels near thewindows.

Push down on the manual lock lever to lock thedoor. To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.When unlocking the driver’s door, you canunlock the other doors by holding the key in theturned position for a few seconds or by quicklyturning the key twice in the lock cylinder.

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe front doors.

Press the bottom part of the power door lockswitch to lock or the top of the switch to unlock allthe doors at once.

The rear doors do not have power door lockswitches. You must use the manual levers to lockand unlock the rear doors when riding in therear seat.


Delayed LockingWith this feature, you can delay the actual lockingof the doors.

When the power door lock switch or the lockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed when the key is not in theignition and the driver’s door is opened, achime will sound three times indicating thatdelayed locking is active.

When all the doors are closed, the doors will lockautomatically after five seconds. If a door isreopened before five seconds have elapsed, thefive second timer will reset itself once all the doorsare closed again.

You can press the door lock switch or the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter again to overridethis feature and lock the doors immediately.

You can turn this feature off using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). When delayed locking isoff, the doors will lock immediately when youpress the power door lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 239 for more information.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thevehicle is programmed so that the doors willlock automatically when all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever is moved outof PARK (P). The doors will automatically unlockwhen you stop the vehicle and move the shift leverback into PARK (P).If your vehicle has a manual transmission, thevehicle is programmed so that the doors will lockautomatically after the vehicle speed reaches5 mph (8 km). The doors will automatically unlockwhen the ignition is turned off and the key isremoved from the ignition.If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doorsare locked, have that person use the manual leveror power door lock switch. When the door is closedagain, it will not lock automatically. Use the manuallever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.The power door locks can be programmedthrough prompts displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). These prompts allowyou to choose various lock and unlock settings.For more information on programming, seeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 239.


Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks thatprevent passengers from opening the rear doorson your vehicle from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Insert your key into the slot next to the reardoor security lock label and turn it to engagethe lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside when this feature is in use.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, the front door powerlock switch or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Then open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert your key into the slot next to therear door security lock label and turn itto disengage the lock.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

The rear door locks will now work normally.


Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lock switch when thekey is in the ignition and any door is open, allthe doors will lock and only the driver’s door willunlock. If you close the doors, you can lockthem using the remote keyless entry transmitter.Be sure to remove the key from the ignitionwhen locking your vehicle.

This feature can be overridden by pressingthe lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter or by pressing the power lock switch asecond time.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 130.


Trunk Lock Release

The remote trunkrelease button is locatedon the lower portionof the driver’s door.

To use the remote trunk release, the shift levermust be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for avehicle with an automatic transmission. The shiftlever must be in NEUTRAL, with the parking brakeset for a vehicle with a manual transmission.

Press the button to open the trunk. You can alsopress the button with the trunk symbol on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to openthe trunk.

If your vehicle is ever without power, you can stillaccess the trunk area. Use one of the followingprocedures to manually open the trunk.

If your vehicle has the rear seat pass-throughdoor, do the following:

1. Fold the rear armrest down and open thepass-through door. See “Rear-Seat PassThrough” following for more information.

2. Reach upward through the opening to locatethe emergency trunk release handle. See“Emergency Trunk Release Handle” for moreinformation.

3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle toopen the trunk lid.

If your vehicle has the split folding rear seat, dothe following:

1. Fold down the rear seatback. See SplitFolding Rear Seat on page 18 for moreinformation.

2. Reach upward through the opening to locatethe trunk release handle.

3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle toopen the trunk lid.


Rear-Seat Pass ThroughIf your vehicle has the rear seat-pass throughdoor, you can access the trunk without opening thetrunk lid. This is especially useful whentransporting long items.

To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest.Then pull the lever all the way down to releasethe door.

To close the door, push it up and back into place.Then try to open the door without pulling up onthe lever to make sure it is locked into place.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the back wall of thetrunk. This handle will glow following exposure tolight. Pull the release handle toward the frontof the vehicle to open the trunk from the inside.


Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.


Power Windows

The power windowswitches are located onthe armrest neareach window.

Press the up or down arrows on the switches toraise or lower the windows.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)that allows you to use the power windows for upto 10 minutes once the ignition has beenturned off. For more information, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 114.

Express-Down WindowPress the down arrow on the switch to the secondposition to activate the express-down feature.To stop the window as it is lowering, pressthe down arrow on the switch again.

Express-Up WindowThis feature is only on front power windows. Pressthe up arrow on the switch to the second positionto activate the express-up feature. To stop thewindow as it is raising, press the up arrow again.

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, you will needto reprogram each front power window forthe express-up feature to work. Beforereprogramming, replace or recharge yourvehicle’s battery.


To program each window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,press and hold the down arrow on thepower window switch until the window hasfully opened.

2. Press the up arrow on the power windowswitch until the window is fully closed.

3. Continue holding the up arrow on the switchfor approximately two seconds after thewindow is completely closed.

The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat theprocess for the other front window.

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window when theexpress-up is active, the window will stop at theobstruction and automatically reverse to apreset factory position. Weather conditions suchas severe icing may also cause the windowto automatically reverse. The window will return tonormal operation once the obstruction orcondition is removed.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, thewindow will not reverse automatically.You or others could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Before youuse express override, make sure that allpeople and obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way down in the express position.The window will rise for as long as the switchis held. Once the switch is released, the expressmode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on anobject in its path. Use care when using theoverride mode.


Window LockoutThis feature allows you to disable the passengerwindow switches.

The passenger windowlockout button is locatedbelow the powerwindow switches on thedriver’s door armrest.

Press the button to disable the passenger windowcontrols. The light on the button will illuminate,indicating that the feature is in use. The passengerwindows still can be raised or lowered using thedriver’s window switches when the lockout featureis active.To restore power to the passenger windows, pressthe button again. The light on the button will go out.You can program this feature to disable allpassenger windows or only the rear passengerwindows. See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 239 for more information.

Sun VisorsSwing down the primary visor to block out glare.It can also be detached from the center mount andmoved to the side to block glare from thatdirection.

The driver’s visor may also have buttons for abuilt-in garage door opener. See Universal HomeRemote System (With Three Round LED) onpage 139 or Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) on page 140 for moreinformation.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorPull the visor down and lift the cover to access themirror. A light comes on when the cover is liftedand goes out when it is closed.


Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent System

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the securitylight is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

If the ignition is off and a door is open, thesecurity light will flash, reminding you to arm thetheft-deterrent system.

To arm the system, do the following:

1. Lock the door using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or the power doorlock switch.

2. Close all the doors. The security light willcome on. It should go off within approximately30 seconds. Your security system is nowarmed.

If a door or a trunk is opened without a key or aRKE transmitter, the horn will sound and the lampswill flash for up to 30 seconds.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lockthe doors with a key or use the manual doorlock. It activates only if you use the RKEtransmitter or the power lock on the door.


To avoid activating the alarm by accident do thefollowing:

• Lock the door with the key or the manual doorlock after the doors are closed if you do notwant to arm the theft-deterrent system.

• Always unlock a door with a key or use theRKE transmitter. Pressing the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter disables thetheft-deterrent system.Unlocking a door any other way will activatethe alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.

If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock thedriver’s door with your key. You can also turnoff the alarm by using the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter, or by starting the vehicle witha valid key.

Testing the Alarm1. Roll down the window, then get out of the

vehicle, keeping the door open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the dooropen, lock the vehicle using the power doorlock switch or the RKE transmitter andclose the door. Wait approximately 30 secondsuntil the security light goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using themanual lock and open the door. The hornwill sound and the exterior lamps will flash.

The alarm can be turned off by unlocking thedriver’s door with the key, using the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter or by starting the carwith a valid key.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, checkto see if the horn works. The horn fuse may beblown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 447. If the fuse does notneed to be replaced, you may need to have yourvehicle serviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm thetheft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.


ImmobilizerThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:


2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.





Immobilizer Operation

Your vehicle has apassive theft-deterrentsystem.

The system works when the key is turned to ON.The key uses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in your vehicle. Only thecorrect key will start the vehicle. If the key is everdamaged, you may not be able to start yourvehicle.


When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine doesnot start and the security light comes on, thekey may have a damaged transponder. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 447. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new key made.

It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoderto learn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.

Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage yourkeys, only a GM dealer can service thetheft-deterrent system to have new keys made.To program additional keys you will require twocurrent driver’s keys. You must add a step to thefollowing procedure. After Step 2, repeat Steps 1and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Thencontinue with Step 3.

To program a new key do the following:1. Verify that the new key has PK3+

stamped on it.2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition

and start the engine. If the engine will notstart see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it toON within ten seconds of removing theprevious key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed. It may not beapparent that the security light went on due tohow quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If the security light comes on and stays on whiledriving, you will be able to restart the engine if youturn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,is not working properly and must be servicedby your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected bythe theft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact Cadillac RoadsideService®. See Roadside Service on page 488.


Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelinesfor the first 500 miles (805 km):• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow.• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).

• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrainfrom using the full throttle while driving.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

If these procedures are not followed, yourengine, axle, or other parts could be damaged.

Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time yournew brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement. Followthis break-in guideline every time you getnew linings.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 328 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.


Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turnthe key to four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from itscylinder could cause damage or break thekey. Use the correct key and turn the key onlywith your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is and you have a manualtransmission vehicle, turn the steering wheelleft and right while you turn the key hard.If none of this works, then your vehicle needsservice.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which thekey can be inserted or removed. This positionlocks the ignition and shifter on automatictransmission vehicles, and the ignition and steeringwheel on manual transmission vehicles.

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off. This position will allow youto turn off the engine.

C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehiclehas an automatic transmission and you turn offthe engine, the transmission will lock. If you needto shift the transmission out of PARK (P), theignition key has to be in ACCESSORY or ON.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or ON position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.


Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove the keyfrom the ignition and take it with you. This will lockthe ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Key Release Button (ManualTransmission)

The key cannot beremoved from theignition of a manualtransmission vehicle,unless the key releasebutton is used.

To remove the key, do the following:

1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY.

2. Press and release the button and then turnthe key to OFF.Do not hold the button in while turning the keyto OFF.

3. Pull the key straight out of the ignition switch.


Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may beused for up to 10 minutes after the ignition keyis turned from ON to OFF:

• Radio

• Power Windows

• Audio Steering Wheel Controls(CTS, if programmed)

• Sunroof

Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutesor if a door is opened. If an additional 10 minutesof power is needed, close all the doors andturn the ignition key to ON and then back to OFF.

Starting the Engine

Automatic TransmissionMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not startin any other position — that is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) ifyour vehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.


Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and theparking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to thefloor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not startif the clutch pedal is not all the way down — that isa safety feature.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turnyour ignition key to START. Then, let go ofthe key; the engine will start automatically.The idle speed will go down as your enginegets warm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects the electricalsystem. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released when theengine begins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking until the vehicle starts oruntil it exceeds the maximum crankingtime allowed, approximately 15 seconds to

prevent cranking motor damage. To preventstarter-motor gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine is alreadyrunning. The engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or OFF position.

2. If your engine will not start, or starts but thenstops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedalall the way to the floor and holding it thereas you turn the key to START. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.


Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. For the 2.8L V6 and the 3.6L V6engines, the cord is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle in front of the fuse block. For the6.0L V8 engine, the cord is located inthe engine compartment on the driver’s sideof the vehicle near the inner fender and abovethe strut.Remove the plastic cap to access the plug.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.


{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.


Automatic Transmission OperationThe shift lever is located on the center consolebetween the front seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start theengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransmission) on page 126. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 328.


Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 128.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

At low vehicle speeds, you can also useREVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sand without damagingyour transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320 foradditional information.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when yourvehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.


DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.The transmission will shift down to a lowergear and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 305

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. If you are stuck, do not spin thetires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive your vehicle at highRPMs without upshifting while using DriverShift Control (DSC), you could damageyour vehicle. Always upshift when necessarywhile using DSC.

Your automatic transmission has a Driver ShiftControl (DSC) feature that allows you to changegears similar to a manual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D) tothe right into the DSC area.

The sport mode light inthe instrument panelcluster will come on.


If you do not move the shift lever forward orrearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode.When you are in the sport mode the vehiclewill still shift automatically. While drivingin sport mode, the transmission may remain ina gear longer than it would in the normaldriving mode based on braking, throttle input,and vehicle lateral acceleration.

2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift leverforward to upshift or rearward to downshift.

The odometer on the instrument panel cluster willchange from the mileage to a number indicatingthe requested gear range when moving theshift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometerand Odometer on page 190 for more informationon the odometer.

While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will havefirmer shifting and increased performance. Youcan use this for sport driving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gear longer, or todown shift for more power or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow you to shift intogears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engineRevolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmissionwill not automatically shift to the next highergear if the engine RPM is too high.

If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currentlyselected gear will flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shifted gears.

While in the DSC mode, the transmission willautomatically downshift when the vehicle comes toa stop and while quickly applying the acceleratorto increase speed. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating your vehicle from a stop insnowy and icy conditions, you may want to shiftinto second gear. A higher gear ratio allows you togain more traction on slippery surfaces.


Manual Transmission OperationIf your vehicle has a manual transmission, the shiftlever is located on the center console betweenthe front seats. The following explains howto operate the manual transmission.

These are the shift patterns for the six-speedmanual transmissions.

Here is how to operate your transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

For the CTS, you can shift into FIRST (1) whenyou are going less than 25 mph (40 km/h). Ifyou come to a complete stop and it is hard to shiftinto FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRALand let up on the clutch. Press the clutchpedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

For the CTS-V, you can shift into FIRST (1) whenyou are going less than 40 mph (64 km/h).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) andSIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same way you do forSECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

CTS CTS-V


NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRALwhen it is centered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal, completely stop the vehicle, and shiftinto REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedalslowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

For the CTS, pull the shift lever quickly to the leftand then forward into gear.

For the CTS-V, the transmission has a safetyfeature that prevents you from shifting intoREVERSE (R) while the vehicle is driven atspeeds greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). You will belocked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph(5 km/h). If you have turned your ignition off andwish to park your vehicle in REVERSE (R),you will have to overcome the lockout mechanismby moving the shift lever quickly to the right,and immediately forward into gear using moreforce than a normal shift.

Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Notice: If you skip more than one gear whenyou downshift, or if you race the enginewhen you release the clutch pedal whiledownshifting, you could damage the engine,clutch, driveshaft or the transmission. Donot skip gears or race the engine whendownshifting.

If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph(32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly,you should downshift to the next lower gear.You may have to downshift two or more gears tokeep the engine running smoothly or for goodperformance.


Skip Shift (CTS-V)

1r4: This message may appear in the messagecenter in the speedometer during light throttle, lowspeed maneuvers (15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h)).When this message appears, you can only shiftfrom FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) instead ofFIRST (1) to SECOND (2).

See One-to-Four Shift Message (CTS-V Only) onpage 217 for more information.

During the shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4),pull the shift lever straight back using light force onthe shift lever. You must complete the shift intoFOURTH (4) to turn off this feature. This helps getthe best possible fuel economy. The skip shiftfeature is turned backed on when the vehicle is ata complete stop and the digital speedometerreads 0 mph (0 km/h).

Notice: Forcing the shift lever intoany gear except FOURTH (4), when theOne – to – Four Shift message comes on,may damage the transmission. Shift onlyfrom FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when theOne – to – Four Shift message comes on.

This message comes on when:

• The engine coolant temperature is higher than169°F (76°C) and you are going 15 to 19 mph(24 to 31 km/h).

• You are pressing the accelerator pedal lessthen a quarter of the way down.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedalis located on the lowerportion of the instrumentpanel to the left of thesteering wheel.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push theparking brake pedal down with your left foot.


If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lighton the instrument panel cluster should comeon. If it does not, you need to have your vehicleserviced. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 197 for more information.

To release the parking brake, pull the releaselever located to the left of the steering wheel onthe instrument panel.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake isset, the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins tomove. To stop the chime, fully release the parkingbrake.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 328 for moreinformation.


Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 328.

To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) bypressing the button on the front of theshift lever while pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle. Releasethe button.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake withyour left foot. See Parking Brake on page 124for more information.

4. Turn the key to OFF.

5. Remove the key from the ignition switch andtake it with you. If you can leave your vehiclewith the key in your hand, the vehicle is inPARK (P).


Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton on the shift lever. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).


Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system.

To shift out of PARK (P):

1. Apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, pressthe shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Before you get out of your vehicle, place the shiftlever in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply theparking brake. Turn the ignition key to OFF, pressthe release button and remove the key. See“Key Release Button” under Ignition Positions onpage 112 for more information.

If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 328.


Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.


Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 130.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 316.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transmission shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmissionshift lever to PARK (P), or the manualtransmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle willnot move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransmission) on page 126 and Parking YourVehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 128.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 328.


Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimminginside rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. Formore information about OnStar®, see OnStar®

System on page 137.

O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on thelower left side of the mirror, is used for theautomatic dimming functions of the rearview mirror.

Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started. Automatic dimmingreduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,press and release the on/off button. The indicatorlight will come on when this feature is on.

Passenger Airbag IndicatorThe mirror may have a passenger airbag indicatoron the mirror glass, just above the buttons. Ifthe vehicle has this feature, the mirror will displaythe word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada,when the passenger airbag is enabled. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 79 for moreinformation.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.


Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassThe vehicle may have an automatic dimminginside rearview mirror with a compass andOnStar® controls. For more information aboutOnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 137.

The mirror has an eight-point compass display inthe upper right corner of the mirror. When on,the compass automatically calibrates, or sets thedriving direction, as the vehicle is driven. If thevehicle has the navigation option, the direction thevehicle is facing will be displayed on thenavigation screen.

O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on thelower left side of the mirror and is used forthe automatic dimming and compass functions ofthe rearview mirror.

Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,press the on/off button. The indicator light willilluminate when this feature is on.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the current compassdirection.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example), theremay be a strong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interference may be caused bya magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, orsimilar object. If the letter C appears in thecompass window, the compass may need to bereset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

The compass can be calibrated by pressing andholding the on/off button until a C is shown inthe compass display.


Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.


Passenger Airbag IndicatorThe mirror may have a passenger airbag indicatoron the mirror glass, just above the buttons.If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror willdisplay the word ON, or an airbag symbolin Canada, when the passenger airbag is enabled.See Passenger Sensing System on page 79 formore information.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Outside Power Mirrors

The control on thedriver’s door armrestoperates both outsiderearview mirrors.

Press the left or right mirror symbol on theselector switch to choose the driver’s side orpassenger’s side mirror. The center position turnsthe control off so that the mirrors will not moveif the control pad is touched.


Once a mirror is selected, use the arrows on thecontrol pad to move the mirror to the correctdirection. Adjust each mirror so you can see theside of your vehicle and the area behind yourvehicle.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors totheir original unfolded position before driving.

If the vehicle has the memory package, the mirrorscan be programmed for personalization andcurb view assist. For more information, seeMemory Seat and Mirrors on page 11 and DICVehicle Personalization on page 239.

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorIf the vehicle has the memory seat and mirrors,the passenger’s mirror can be tilted to apreselected position when the vehicle is shiftedinto REVERSE (R). Use this outside curbview assist feature to view the curb when parallelparking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)and after a five-second delay, the passenger’smirror will return to its original position.

If further adjustment is needed after the mirror isin a tilted position, the mirror controls can be used.See Outside Power Mirrors on page 135 formore information.

The outside curb view assist can be turned or offthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 239 formore information.


Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so that more can beseen from the driver’s seat. The mirror does nothave a dimming feature.

Outside Heated MirrorsWhen the rear window defogger is turned on, italso warms both outside rearview mirrors tohelp clear them of fog or ice. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Dual Climate Control Systemon page 180 for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency where OnStar® advisors can requestemergency services be sent to your location.If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar®

at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.


A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and theTerms and Conditions of the OnStar® SubscriptionService Agreement are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber Information packet located inyour vehicle. For more information, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles that have OnStar®, the Safe &Sound Plan is included for one year from the dateof purchase. You can extend this plan beyondthe first year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan to meet your needs. For moreinformation, press the OnStar® button to speakwith an advisor.

Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Directions & Connections® Plan• All Safe & Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®

subscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands at the touch of a button. Hands-FreeCalling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and maybe used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages orlinked to a cell phone through OnStar® SharedMinutes Plan. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owner’s Guide, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®

advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).


OnStar® Virtual AdvisorYour vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is afeature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that usesyour minutes to access weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.Customize your information profile atwww.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’sguide for more information.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.


The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.



Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.



Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.


Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.


Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

To program up to three channels,

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

Example of Switch Settings


4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 7 than what youused for the garage door opener.


Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, youhave 10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.


3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–6, choosing adifferent function button in Step 4 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 486.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have thestop and reverse feature. This includes any garagedoor opener model manufactured before April 1,1982. If you have a newer garage door openerwith rolling codes, please be sure to followSteps 6 through 8 to complete the programming ofyour Universal Home Remote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 486.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.


Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codeequipped device, most commonly, a garagedoor opener.


6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release. Repeatthe press/hold/release sequence a secondtime, and depending on the brand of thegarage door opener, or other rolling codedevice, repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate your rolling-code equipped device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.


Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 486.


Storage AreasGlove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.Use your door key to lock or unlock it.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders for the front seatpassengers. They are located in the centerconsole.

There are two cupholders located in the rear seatcenter armrest. Pull the armrest down to accessthe cupholders.

Center Console Storage Area(CTS Only)Your vehicle may have a center console with astorage tray, a storage compartment, a dualcupholder with a removable rubber liner and anarmrest. To access the storage area, pull upon the latch located at the front of the armrest.

Map PocketThe map/storage pockets are located on eachdoor as well as on the back of the front seatbacks.


Roof Rack

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

The vehicle has threaded nuts that are coveredwith a plastic cap on the roof rails, that indicate themounting locations for a roof rack or luggagecarrier. Open the doors to access these locations.Remove the plastic cap before attaching a roofrack or luggage carrier.

For more information on purchasing therack/carrier as well as installation information,contact your dealer.

Convenience NetThe convenience net attaches to the floor andback wall of the trunk using four anchor pointswhich allows the net to be used two ways. It canbe attached like a hammock or anchored tolay flat across the floor of the trunk. Put smallloads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can helpkeep them from falling over during sharp turnsor quick starts and stops.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store themin the trunk as far forward as you can. Whennot using the net, hook the net to the tabs securingit to the sill plate.


SunroofYour vehicle may have a power sunroof. It willoperate when the ignition is turned on, or inACCESSORY, or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 114.

The sunroof controls arelocated on the overheadconsole.

@ (Half Open): Turn the control clockwise tothis position to open the glass panel half way. Thesunshade will open with the glass panel, or itcan be opened manually.

P (Comfort Stop): Turn the control clockwiseto this position to open the glass panel aboutthree quarters of the way. The sunshade will openwith the glass panel, or it can be openedmanually.

This is called the comfort stop position. It providesless wind noise than the full-open position.

A (Full Open): Turn the control clockwise tothis position to open the glass panel all theway. The sunshade will open with the glass panel,or it can be opened manually.

I (Vent): Turn the control counterclockwise tothis position to use the vent feature. The glasspanel will tilt upward from the vehicle. Thesunshade must be opened manually.

? (Close): Turn the control to this position toclose the sunroof. The sunshade must beclosed manually.


Anti-Pinch FeatureIf an object is in the path of the sunroof when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof from closing at thepoint of the obstruction. The sunroof will thenreturn to the full-open or vent position. To closethe sunroof once it has re-opened, turn the controlto the closed position.

Anti-Pinch Feature OverrideA condition may exist that causes the anti-pinchfeature of the sunroof to activate due to weather oran obstruction. In an emergency, the anti-pinchfeature can be overridden in a supervised mode.

To override the anti-pinch feature rotate thesunroof control to the closed position, then pressthe control upward and continue pressingupward until the sunroof reaches the desiredposition.

In this mode, the sunroof can still close on anobject in its path. Use care when using theoverride mode.


Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 158Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 160Other Warning Devices ............................. 160Horn .......................................................... 160Tilt Wheel .................................................. 161Reconfigurable Steering Wheel

Controls (SWC) (CTS) ........................... 161Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 163Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 163Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 164Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 164Windshield Wipers ..................................... 165Windshield Washer .................................... 166Headlamp Washer ..................................... 167Cruise Control ........................................... 168Headlamps ................................................ 172Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 172Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 173Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 173Fog Lamps ................................................ 175Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 175Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 176Entry Lighting ............................................ 176Parade Dimming ........................................ 177Reading Lamps ......................................... 177

Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 177Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 178Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 179

Climate Controls ......................................... 180Dual Climate Control System ..................... 180Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 185Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 186Steering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS) ..... 187

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 188Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 189Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 190Trip Odometers ......................................... 191Tachometer ............................................... 191Engine Speed Limiter ................................ 191Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 192Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 192Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 194Charging System Light .............................. 196Brake System Warning Light ..................... 197Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 198Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 199Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Light (CTS) ............................................ 200

Section 3 Instrument Panel


Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 200Tire Pressure Light (CTS-V Only) .............. 201Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 202Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 206Sport Mode Light (Automatic

Transmission/CTS) ................................. 207Security Light ............................................ 207Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 207Lights On Reminder .................................. 207Cruise Control Light .................................. 208Highbeam On Light ................................... 208Fuel Gage ................................................. 208

Message Center .......................................... 209Message Center (CTS-V) .......................... 209Transmission Fluid Hot Message ............... 214Hot Coolant Temperature Warning

Message ................................................ 215Check Engine Oil Pressure Message ......... 215Oil Temperature Warning Message ............ 216Tire Pressure Warning Message ................ 216One-to-Four Shift Message (CTS-V Only) .... 217

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 218System Controls ........................................ 218Status of Vehicle Systems ......................... 219DIC Main Menu ......................................... 224DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 228DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 239

Audio System(s) ......................................... 258Setting the Time ........................................ 260Radio with CD ........................................... 260XM Radio Messages ................................. 279Navigation/Radio System ........................... 281Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 281Audio Steering Wheel Controls (CTS) ........ 281Audio Steering Wheel Controls (CTS-V) .... 282Radio Reception ........................................ 284Care of Your CDs ..................................... 285Care of the CD Player .............................. 285Diversity Antenna System .......................... 286XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 286

Section 3 Instrument Panel


✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview

CTS shown, CTS-V similar


The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 185.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.C. Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls (CTS)

(If Equipped) or Message Center Controls(CTS-V). See Reconfigurable Steering WheelControls (SWC) (CTS) on page 161 orMessage Center (CTS-V) on page 209.Steering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS). SeeSteering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS)on page 187. Traction Control Disable Button(CTS-V). See Traction Control System(TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 189.

E. Windshield Wiper Lever. See WindshieldWipers on page 165.

F. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 160.

G. Audio (Base Audio System) or Audio/NavigationSystem (If Equipped). See Audio System(s) onpage 258 or Navigation/Radio System onpage 281.

H. Voice Recognition Button (If Equipped).See Navigation System Supplement.

I. Audio Volume Knob and Source Button(CTS Only). See Audio Steering WheelControls (CTS) on page 281 or Audio SteeringWheel Controls (CTS-V) on page 282.

J. Storage Compartment or Ashtray (If Equipped).See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter onpage 179.

K. Transmission Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 118 or ManualTransmission Operation on page 122.

L. Accessory Power Outlet or Cigarette Lighter(If Equipped). See Accessory Power Outlet(s)on page 178 or Ashtray(s) and CigaretteLighter on page 179.

M. Climate Control System. See Dual ClimateControl System on page 180.

N. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 151.Traction Control Disable Button (CTS). SeeTraction Control System (TCS) (CTS) onpage 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)(CTS-V) on page 297


Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.


Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel andpull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to acomfortable position and release the lever tolock the wheel in place.

Reconfigurable Steering WheelControls (SWC) (CTS)If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you tocustomize the four steering wheel controls to workwith the OnStar®, the climate controls, audio,and traction control systems.

The controls for thisfeature are located onthe left spoke ofthe steering wheel.

If your vehicle has the base audio system, do thefollowing:

1. Access the main menu of the audio system bypressing the TUNE/SEL (SELECT) knoblocated at the lower right of the audio system.

2. Scroll through the menu by turning the knob.


3. When SETUP appears on the display, pressthe knob once to select it.

4. Scroll through the SETUP menu by turningthe knob.

5. When CONFIGURE SWC KEYS appears onthe display, press the knob once to select it.

6. Scroll through the buttons (1, 2, 3 or 4). Pressthe knob to select the desired number.

7. Choose a new function for the control byscrolling through the list of available functions.

8. Once you have highlighted your choice, pressthe knob once to select it.The control you selected is now programmedwith the function you selected.

9. Press the CLR (CLEAR) button to exit eachmenu. To program another control, repeat theprocedure.

If your vehicle has the Navigation system, do thefollowing:

1. Press the MAIN button located to the lowerleft of the display.

2. Press the multi-function button next to theSetup prompt at the right of the display.

3. Press the multi-function button next to ProgSWC located at the right of the screen.

4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through theavailable functions.

5. Once the function desired is highlighted, pressand hold the multi-function button next to thecontrol you want to program (1, 2, 3 or 4).The buttons are located at the right ofthe display.When a control is successfully programmed,the function you selected will appear nextto the number of the control at the right of thedisplay.

6. Press the multi-function button next to theBack prompt to exit each menu. To programanother control, repeat the procedure.

When a control is programmed with a function,that function cannot be used with any other control.It becomes available again only when anotherfunction is programmed to the control.


Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 163.

• O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 172.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 164.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 164.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 175.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 168.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. The lever returns automatically whenthe turn is complete.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until thelane change is complete. The lever returns to itsoriginal position when it is released.

Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turnor lane change may be caused by a burned-outsignal bulb. Other driver’s will not see the signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbsif the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 447 formore information.


Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),a warning chime will sound and the Turn SignalOn message will appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228for more information.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward on the turn signal/multifunctionlever to change the headlamps from low to highbeam. Pull the lever back and then release itto change from high to low beam.

If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,the high beams will be on the next time youstart your vehicle.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill be on, indicatinghigh-beam usage.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows you to use the high-beamheadlamps to signal the driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you to use this feature. When you do this,the following will occur:

• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or inDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, thehigh-beam headlamps will turn on. They willstay on as long as you hold the leverthere. Release the lever to turn them off.

• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, theywill switch to low beam. To return tohigh-beam, push the lever away from you.


Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers.

7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it fora single wiping cycle. The lever will return to itsoriginal position. For more cycles, hold thelever down before releasing it.

9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn offthe wipers.

& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set adelay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustmentband to set the length of the delay.

6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set thelength of the delay between wipes when using thedelay feature. The closer you move the bandtoward mist, the longer the delay. The windshieldwiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.

6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor slow, steady wiping cycles.

1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor rapid wiping cycles.

If the windshield wipers are in use for aboutsix seconds while you are driving, the exteriorlamps will come on automatically if the exteriorlamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps on page 172 for more information.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades.For more information, see Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 390.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.


Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with thissymbol located at the end of the windshield washerlever to wash the windshield. Washer fluid willspray onto the windshield and the wipers will runfor a few cycles to clear the windshield. Formore wash cycles, press and hold the button.

If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the CheckWasher Fluid message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) display. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 228.

If the headlamps are on when you wash thewindshield, the headlamp washers, if the vehiclehas them, will turn on. Both the windshield and theheadlamps will be washed. See “HeadlampWasher” following for more information.


Headlamp WasherIf your vehicle has the high-intensity discharge(HID) headlamps, your vehicle will also haveheadlamp washers. The headlamp washers helpclear the headlamp lenses.

The headlamp washersare located on theinboard side ofthe headlamp lenses.

The headlamps must be on in order to be washed.If the headlamps are off, only the windshield willbe washed when the washer button is pressed.To wash the headlamps, press the washer buttonlocated at the end of the windshield wiper lever.Both the headlamps and the windshield will bewashed.

See Windshield Washer on page 166 for moreinformation.


Cruise ControlThese controls arelocated on the end ofthe multifunction lever.

9 (Off): This position turns the system off.

R (On): This position turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to thissymbol to make the vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to accelerate when cruise is alreadyactive.

T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the speed when cruiseis already active.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.


If your vehicle is in cruise control when theTraction Control System (TCS) begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System(TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297 andStabiliTrak® System on page 299. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again,you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill come on whilecruise control is on.


Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. But you donot need to reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release theswitch or apply the brake. So unless you wantto go faster, do not hold the switch atresume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you getup to the desired speed and then releasethe switch. To increase your speed invery small amounts, move the switch briefly toresume/accelerate. Each time you do this,your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)faster.

If using the accelerator pedal and the set button atend of the lever to increase cruise set speed,the new set speed must be at least 5 mph higherthan the current speed for this method to work.If it is not 5 mph higher, switch cruise switchoff, then on, and then reset your speed using theset button.


Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press in the button at the end of the lever untilthe desired lower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain your speed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep the speed reduced. Applying the brake orshifting into a lower gear will take you out of cruisecontrol. If you need to apply the brake or shift toa lower gear due to the grade of the downhillslope, you may not want to use the cruise controlfeature.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end a cruise control session, step lightly on thebrake pedal. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, lightly tapping the clutch pedal willalso end a cruise control session.

Stepping on the brake or clutch pedal will only endthe current cruise control session. Move thecruise control switch to off to completely turn offthe system.


Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

HeadlampsThe exterior lamp control is located in the middleof the turn signal/multifunction lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingfour positions:

9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turnsoff all lamps except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

; (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the parking lamps togetherwith the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to thisposition puts the headlamps in automaticmode. AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps onand off depending upon how much light isavailable outside of the vehicle.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers have been inuse for about six seconds. For this feature to work,the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO.

When the exterior lamp control is off or in theparking lamp position and the windshield wipercontrol is in any position except off, the HeadlampsSuggested message will appear on the DICdisplay. See “Headlamps Suggested Message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228for more information.

When the ignition is turned to OFF, thewiper-activated headlamps will immediately turnoff. They will also turn off if the windshieldwiper control is turned off.


Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lampcontrol is left on in either the headlamp or parkinglamp position and the driver’s door is openedwith the ignition off. See Lights On Reminder onpage 207 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the turn signal lampscome on when the following conditions are met:

• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON orSTART.

• The exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO andthe headlamps are off.

• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, only your front turn signallamps will be on. No other exterior lamps will beon. Your instrument panel cluster will not belit up either.

When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and itis dark enough outside, the DRL will turn offand the low-beam headlamps will turn on. When itis bright enough outside, the low-beam headlampswill go off, and the DRL will turn back on. If youstart your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately.Once you leave the garage, it will take about oneminute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. Duringthat delay, your instrument panel cluster may notbe as bright as usual. Make sure your instrumentpanel brightness lever is in the full bright position.See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 176.


If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lampcontrol is off, a Headlamps Suggested messagewill appear on the Driver’s Information Center(DIC) display. This message informs the driver thatturning on the exterior lamps is recommendedeven though the DRL are still on. Turningthe exterior lamp control to AUTO or to thelow-beam headlamp position will turn off the DRLand cancel the Headlamps Suggested message.If the parking lamps or the fog lamps wereturned on instead, the DRL will still turn off andthe Headlamps Suggested message will bedisplayed. You can turn it off by pressing the OKbutton if you have the Navigation audio systemor the CLR (Clear) button if you have thebase audio system.

To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn theexterior lamp control off. Then turn on thefog lamps or parking lamps, and the DRL will turnoff. The Headlamps Suggested message willappear on the DIC display. This will workregardless of gear position and whether or not theparking brake is set.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Light Sensor

The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlampfeature is located on top of the instrument panel.If you cover the sensor, it will prevent it fromsensing light, and the exterior lamps or theHeadlamps Suggested message will appear onthe DIC whenever the ignition is on.


Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

The fog lamp control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

- (Fog Lamps): The band with/or next to thissymbol is used to turn the fog lamps on and off.

The parking lamps must be on for the fog lampsto work.

To operate the fog lamps:

• To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lampband on the lever up to the dot and releaseit. The band will return to its original position.

• To turn the fog lamps off, turn the forlamp band up to the dot and release it. Theband will return to its original position, and thefog lamps will turn off. If the high-beamheadlamps are turned on, the fog lamps willalso turn off. They will turn back on againwhen you switch back to low-beamheadlamps.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have been lefton, the exterior lamps will turn off about10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. Thisprotects against draining the battery in case theheadlamps or parking lamps have been lefton. The battery saver does not work if theheadlamps are turned on after the ignition is turnedto OFF.

If you need to leave the lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control toturn the lamps back on.


Instrument Panel BrightnessThe lever for thisfeature is located on theoverhead console.

Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten thelights or away from it to dim them.

If you slide the lever all the way toward thesymbol past the resistance point, the interior lampswill come on. To turn them off, slide the leverback toward the minimum brightness setting.

Entry LightingThe entry lighting system turns on the reading anddome lamps and the backlighting to the exteriorlamp control when a door is opened or if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter unlockbutton is pressed. If activated by the (RKE),the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds.The entry lighting system uses the light sensoron the instrument panel; so it must be dark outsidein order for the lamps to turn on. The lamps turnoff about 25 seconds after the last door isclosed. They will dim to off if the ignition key isturned to ON, or immediately turn off if the powerlocks are used.


Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits dimming of the instrumentpanel displays and backlighting during daylighthours when the key is in the ignition and theheadlamps are on. This feature operates with thelight sensor and is fully automatic. When the lightsensor reads darkness outside and the parkinglamps are active, the instrument panel displays canbe adjusted by sliding the instrument panelbrightness lever toward the symbol to brighten oraway from the symbol to dim the lighting.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overheadconsole. These lamps come on automatically whenany door is opened.

For manual operation, press the button next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automaticallyshut off 10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, in case the underhoodlamp, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps, readinglamps, console, or glove box lamps areaccidentally left on, or something is left pluggedinto the accessory power outlet or cigarette lighter.If any of the accessory lamps are left on, theywill automatically time-out after about 20 minutes.To reset the battery protection, all of the abovelamps must be turned off or the ignition key mustbe in ON.


Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectauxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

There are two accessory power outlets. The frontaccessory power outlet is located in the ashtrayon the instrument panel below the climate controlsystem. The outlet will have a cigarette lighterif your vehicle has this option. Remove thecigarette lighter to access the outlet.

The rear accessory power outlet is located on theback of the center console.

To use an outlet, remove the protective cap.When not in use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap. The accessory power outlet isoperational at all times.

Notice: If electrical devices are left pluggedinto a power outlet, the battery may draincausing your vehicle not to start or damage tothe battery. This would not be covered bythe warranty. Always unplug all electricaldevices when turning off your vehicle.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.


Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

AshtrayThe ashtray is located under the climate controlpanel on the instrument panel. Press on thedoor to release the ashtray.

To empty the ashtray, remove it from theinstrument panel by gripping the edges and pullingstraight out. To reinstall, push the tray back intoplace.

Cigarette LighterThe cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.The vehicle does not have a cigarette lighter forthe rear seat passengers.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of15 amperes.

See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 178 formore information.

To use the lighter, press the lighter all the way inand release it. It will pop back out to use oncethe element has heated.


Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressedand the temperature is set, the system willautomatically control the inside temperature, theair delivery mode, the air conditioning compressor,and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on thedisplay.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat orcool any faster. If you set the system atthe warmest temperature setting, the systemwill remain in manual mode at that temperatureand it will not go into automatic mode.In cold weather, the system will start atreduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold airinto your vehicle until warmer air is available.The system will start out blowing air at the floorbut may change modes automatically as thevehicle warms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The length of time neededfor warm up will depend on the outsidetemperature and the length of time that haselapsed since your vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust thetemperature, if necessary.

Uplevel Version Shown, Base Similar


You can switch from English to metric unitsthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). If youhave the Base audio system, see DIC MainMenu on page 224. If you have the Navigationsystem, see “Setup Menu” in the Index ofthe Navigation System Owner Manual.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel, near thewindshield. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch andchanging the mode cancels automatic operationand places the system in manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automatic operation.

The outboard air outlets will always receive airflowregardless of the mode selected. See OutletAdjustment on page 185 to change this airflowfrom the outboard outlets.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets,and then directs most of the remaining air to thefloor outlets. In automatic operation, cooler airis directed to the upper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.

[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theoutboard outlets (for the side windows), and a littleair directed to the windshield.

The mode switch can also be used to select thedefog mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.

yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Pressing this switchcancels automatic operation and places the systemin manual mode. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.


If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 186 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 463.

h (Recirculation): This mode keeps outsideair from coming in the vehicle. It can be usedto prevent outside air and odors from entering yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly. Press this button toswitch between recirculation and fresh air. Pressthe auto button to have the system select the bestair delivery mode for your temperature setting.

Recirculation is not available in the defrost modeand will automatically turn off after 10 minuteswhen defog is selected.

Using recirculation for long periods of time maycause the air inside your vehicle to become too dryor stuffy. To prevent this from happening, afterthe air in your vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off or press the auto button.

QPWRR (Power/Driver’s Temperature): Pressthe PWR button located on the driver’s side ofthe climate control panel to turn the entire climatecontrol system on or off. Press the up or downarrow on the switch to increase or decreasethe automatic temperature setting.

QPWRR (Power/Passenger’sTemperature): Press the PWR button located onthe passenger’s side of the climate controlpanel to allow the passenger’s climate controlsetting to be different than the driver’s. Press theup or down arrow on the switch to increase ordecrease the automatic temperature setting.

A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button tomanually turn off the air conditioning compressor.Press AUTO to return to automatic operationor press the A/C OFF button again.


Sensors

There is a solar sensor located on the instrumentpanel, near the windshield.

There is also an interiortemperature sensorlocated to the right ofthe steering wheelon the instrument panel.

These sensors monitor the solar radiation and theair inside your vehicle, they use the informationto maintain the selected temperature by adjustingto the temperature, the fan speed, and the airdelivery system. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also be activated,as necessary. Do not cover the sensors orthe automatic climate control system will notwork properly.


Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There are twomodes to clear fog from your windshield. Use thedefog mode to clear the windows of fog ormoisture and warm the passengers. Use thedefrost mode to remove fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly.

yN z (Mode): Press this button until defogappears on the display.

- (Defog): This mode directs the air betweenthe windshield, floor outlets and side windows.When this mode is selected, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the air-conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is ator below freezing. If recirculation mode is selectedwhile in defog mode, it will be cancelled after10 minutes.

If there is fog on the side windows, turn thethumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the sidewindow defog position. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 185 for more information.

0 (Defrost): Pressing defrost directs most ofthe air to the windshield, with some air directed tothe side windows. In this mode, the system willautomatically turn off recirculation and runthe air-conditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing.

This mode may also cause the fan speed and airtemperature to increase.

If there is fogging on the side windows, turn thethumbwheel on the outboard outlets to theside window defog position. See Outlet Adjustmenton page 185 for more information. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.


Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in ON.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible.

The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed, but if thevehicle’s speed is above 30 mph (48 km/h),the rear defogger will stay on continuously.If turned on again, the defogger will only run forabout five minutes before turning off. The defoggercan also be turned off by pressing the buttonagain or by turning off the engine.

The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat tohelp clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrorwhen the rear window defogger button is on.See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 137.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of the front windshieldand rear window with a razor blade or anythingelse that is sharp. This may damage the rearwindow defogger grid and affect your radio’sability to pick up stations clearly. The repairswouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the knobs located in the center of each outletto change the direction of the airflow. Use thethumbwheels to open or close the outlets.

j (Side Window Defog): Turn the thumbwheelto this symbol to use the side window defogsetting. The air coming through the outlets will bedirected toward the side windows to clear fog.

k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol toopen the outlets completely and allow themaximum amount of air to enter your vehicle. Asmall amount of air will still be directed to the sidewindows.

l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbolto close the outlets and minimize the amountof air entering the vehicle.


Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter traps most ofthe pollen from the air entering your vehicle.Like your vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needsto be changed periodically. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 463.

Using the climate control system without thepassenger air filter installed may allow water orother debris to enter the system. This could causea water leak or noises. Make sure to install anew air filter after removing the old one.

The passenger compartment air filter is locatedunderneath the hood below the windshieldwiper arm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 342for more information on location.

Use the procedure listed below to replace thepassenger compartment air filter:

1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.

2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn themoff again when the wipers are straight on thewindshield.This allows you access to the leaf screen. Thepassenger compartment air filter is locatedunder the leaf screen.


3. Open the hood to access the enginecompartment. See Hood Release on page 341for more information.

4. Remove the four screws that hold the leafscreen in place and lift off the screen bylifting and sliding toward the center ofthe vehicle.

5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each endof the filter cover.

6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straightupward.

7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointingtoward the passenger compartment.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 476 for the correct part numberfor the filter.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstallthe cover.

Steering Wheel ClimateControls (CTS)Your vehicle may have four controls that canbe programmed for use with the climatecontrol system.

The controls are locatedon the left side of thesteering wheel.

See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls(SWC) (CTS) on page 161 for more information onprogramming these controls.


Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on while you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 218 for more information.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will needto know to drive safely and economically.

CTS (United States version shown, Canada similar)


Speedometer and Odometer

The speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) orkilometers (used in Canada).

CTS-V (United States version shown, Canada similar)


If your vehicle has to have a new odometerinstalled, the new one may read the correctmileage. This is because your vehicle’s computerhas stored the mileage in memory.

While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature isactive, the odometer will change to show the gearrange. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 118 for more information.

Trip OdometersThe trip odometer can record the number of milesor kilometers traveled for up to two trips.

The trip odometer is part of the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), for more information see Statusof Vehicle Systems on page 219.

For vehicles that have the navigation system, seeyour Navigation System manual for moreinformation.

TachometerThis gage indicates the engine speed inRevolutions Per Minute (RPM).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Engine Speed LimiterThis feature prevents the engine from operating attoo many revolutions per minute (rpm). Whenthe engine’s rpms are too high, the throttleis closed to reduce speed. If this is not sufficient,then the fuel supply to the engine will belimited. When the rpms return to normal, the fuelsupply will return to normal. This helps preventdamage to the engine.


Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the chimewill not come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 68.


This light will come onwhen the ignition key isturned to ON and itwill flash for afew seconds.

Then the light should go out. This means thesystem is ready. If it does not go out, have yourvehicle serviced right away.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on while you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

If there is a problem with the airbag system inyour vehicle, the Service Air Bag messagewill appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)display. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 228 for more information.


Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour rearview mirror has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).United States

Canada


{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 79 for more on this,including important safety information.


If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 192.

Charging System Light

When you turn the keyto ON or START, thislight will come on brieflyto show that thegenerator and batterycharging systemsare working properly.

If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.To save your battery until you get there, turn offall accessories. For more information see DICWarnings and Messages on page 228.


Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 326.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

United States Canada


Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),the light will comeon when your engine isstarted and stay onfor several seconds.This is normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the anti-lockportion of the brake system. If the brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 197 for moreinformation.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop assoon as possible and turn the ignition off. Thenstart the engine again to reset the system. Ifthe light still stays on, or comes on again whileyou are driving, your vehicle needs service. If theregular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning lightis also on, you do not have anti-lock brakesand there is a problem with your regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 197 formore information.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to ON. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.


Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If the TC (tractioncontrol) warning lightcomes on and stays on,there may be aproblem with the tractioncontrol system.

The TC warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to ON. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

The light will also come on if you turn the tractioncontrol system off using the TC on/off buttonlocated in the glove box for the CTS and on thesteering wheel for the CTS-V.

If the TC warning light stays on or comes on whileyou are driving, pull off the road as soon aspossible and stop carefully. Try resetting thesystem by turning the ignition off then back on. Ifthe light still stays on or comes back on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service.Have the Traction Control System (TCS)inspected as soon as possible. See TractionControl System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295or Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) onpage 297 for more information.


Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light (CTS)

This light will come onwhen you first start thevehicle as a checkto let you know that thelight is working.

It will go out after a few seconds. If the light doesnot come on, see your GM dealer.

If the light does not go out or if the light comes onand stays on while you are driving, your vehiclemay have a problem with the cooling system. Youshould stop the vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible to avoid damage to theengine. A warning chime will also sound when thislight is on.

See Engine Overheating on page 360 andMessage Center (CTS-V) on page 209 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature. If the gagepointer moves intothe shaded area, theengine is too hot.

That reading means the same thing as thewarning light – the engine coolant is very hot. SeeEngine Overheating on page 360.


Tire Pressure Light (CTS-V Only)

If the vehicle has theTire Pressure MonitorSystem, this lightwill come on if thesystem detects low tirepressure.

This light will also come on for a bulb check whenthe vehicle is started.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405for more information.

For more information on the proper tire pressure,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 321. Formore information on your tires, see Tires onpage 392.


Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 332.


This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.


If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 338.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 334. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.(These conditions may go away once the engineis warmed up.) This will be detected by thesystem and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.


Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving.If you have done this and your vehicle still doesnot pass the inspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.


Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come onwhen there is a problemwith your engine oilpressure.

This light will come on when you turn your key toON or START. It goes off once you start theengine. That is a check to be sure the light works.If it does not come on, be sure to have it fixedso it will be there to warn you if there is a problem.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem. See Engine Oil onpage 346 for more information.


Sport Mode Light(Automatic Transmission/CTS)

This light will come onwhile the sport mode isin use.

When you turn off the sport mode, the light will goout. If it stays on, your vehicle may need service.See your dealer. See “Sport Mode” underAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 118for more information.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystem on page 107.

Fog Lamp Light

This light will come onwhen the fog lamps arein use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 175 for moreinformation.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 173 formore information.


Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 168for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 164 for more information.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsapproximately howmuch fuel is in the fueltank. It works onlywhen the ignition is inthe ON position.

If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Lowmessage will appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and a single chime will sound. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 formore information.


Here are a few concerns some owners have hadabout the fuel gage. All of these situations arenormal and do not indicate that anything is wrongwith the fuel gage:

• At the gas station the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• The gage may change when you turn, stopquickly or accelerate quickly.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tankthan the gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated that the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less than halfthe tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

Message Center

Message Center (CTS-V)Your vehicle may have a message center that candisplay information relating to powertrain fluids,tire pressures, vehicle dynamics, speedometer andodometer information, and transmission status.It also displays warning messages. There are twodifferent areas where message center informationwill be displayed. One display is inside of thetachometer and the other is inside of thespeedometer.


These are the controlsfor the message center.They are located onthe left spoke ofthe steering wheel.

The outboard switch (A and B) controls the displayof information inside of the tachometer. Theupper button (C) on the inboard switch controlsthe display of information inside of thespeedometer. The lower button (D) on the inboardswitch turns the traction control on or off. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295or Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) onpage 297 for more information.

Speedometer DisplayThis display will show information relating tovehicle speed, odometer, and transmission status.The information displayed can be changed bypressing (C). Pressing this button cycles thedisplayed information as follows: digitalspeedometer only, odometer only, speedometerand odometer, or blank display.

When the transmission is shifted intoREVERSE (R), an R will appear in theupper right corner.

During slow speed maneuvers, the engine’scomputer may command the transmission toengage the Skip Shift feature. For moreinformation see Manual Transmission Operationon page 122.


Tachometer DisplayPress (B) to cycle through the following displays:coolant temperature, oil pressure, oil temperature,transmission temperature, tire pressure, andlateral acceleration. Press (A) to cycle through thedisplays in reverse order. If you press (A), forabout one second, the display will become blank.

Coolant Temperature

When the coolanttemperature displaysyou will see the coolanttemperature symbol.

The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit orCelsius with a graph beneath the reading. If thegraph shows the temperature in the shadedarea all the way on the right, then the coolanttemperature is hot. See Engine Overheatingon page 360 for more information.

Oil Pressure

When the oil pressuredisplays you will see theoil pressure symbol.

The oil pressure displays in psi or kPa with agraph beneath the reading. If the graph shows thepressure in the shaded area all the way to theleft, then the oil pressure is low. See Engine Oil onpage 346 and DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 228 for more information.


Oil Temperature

When the oiltemperature displaysyou will see the oiltemperature symbol.

The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit orCelsius with a graph beneath the reading. If thegraph shows the temperature in the shadedarea all the way on the right, then the oiltemperature is hot. See Engine Oil on page 346for more information.

Transmission Temperature

When the transmissiontemperature displaysyou will see thetransmissiontemperature symbol.

The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit orCelsius with a graph beneath the reading. If thegraph shows the temperature in the shadedarea all the way on the right, then the transmissiontemperature is hot. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 228 and Manual TransmissionFluid on page 355 for more information.


Tire PressureWhen the tire pressure is displayed you will see avehicle in the display. The numbers in eachcorner represent the tire pressure for thecorresponding tire. The tire pressure will bedisplayed in psi or kPa.

If any of the tires are blinking on the vehicle in thedisplay, this means that the tire pressure in thattire is either high or low. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 405 for more information.

Lateral AccelerationLateral acceleration is a measure of how hard youare taking a corner. For example, when you areturning right you will feel your body push to the left.This force is measured in a “g”. This gage willdisplay from 0.00 g to 1.2 g. The lowest readingmeans there is no lateral acceleration. The highestreading means the force the driver is feeling is1.2 times the acceleration due to gravity.

When (B) is pressed and held while the LateralAcceleration display is being shown, the peak holdvalues—both tick marks and numbers—will bereset to zero.

Warning MessagesThe warning messages that are described in thefollowing text are also shown in the tachometerdisplay.

While any warning messages are shown,pressing (A) or (B) will acknowledge the warningand then display the gage relating to the message.For instance, if a tire is below the minimumrecommended pressure, the tire pressure warningmessage will blink on and off (five times for alow tire warning, continuously for a flat tirewarning). The driver can go to the tire pressuredisplay immediately by pressing either buttonon the outboard switch.


Transmission Fluid Hot Message

When you see thisflashing symbol, thetransmission fluidtemperature is high(290°F (143°C)).

To acknowledge this warning, press either buttonon the outboard switch on the left spoke of thesteering wheel. After you press this button, thewarning will redisplay every 10 minutes until thetemperature returns to the normal operating range.

If this message appears, you may continue to driveat a slower speed while monitoring the transmissionfluid temperature. Ideally, the transmission oiltemperature should not rise above 265°F (129°C). Ifyou regularly experience temperatures above thislimit due to high performance operation, it isrecommended to use an auxiliary fluid cooler for thetransmission and differential. See your dealer fordetails. If this warning is displayed during normalvehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle mayneed service. See your dealer for an inspection.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 andManual Transmission Fluid on page 355 for moreinformation.


Hot Coolant Temperature WarningMessage

When you see thisflashing symbol, theengine coolanttemperature is high(257°F (125°C)).

To acknowledge this warning, press either buttonon the outboard switch on the left spoke of thesteering wheel. After you press a button, thiswarning will come on every 10 minutes until thetemperature returns to the normal operating range.Driving aggressively or driving on long hills cancause the engine coolant temperature to be higherthan normal. The Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light should also come on. See EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Light (CTS) onpage 200 for more information. If this warning isdisplayed during normal vehicle operation onflat roads, your vehicle may need service.See your dealer for an inspection.

Check Engine Oil Pressure Message

Your vehicle may havethis feature. When yousee this flashingsymbol, the engine oilpressure is low.

To acknowledge this warning, press either buttonon the outboard switch on the left spoke of thesteering wheel. After you press this button, thewarning will redisplay every 10 minutes until thepressure returns to the normal operating range. Oilpressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). Incertain situations such as long, extended idles onhot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) andstill be considered normal. It may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oil viscosity. TheOil Pressure Light shoud also come on. See OilPressure Light on page 206 for more information.


Oil Temperature Warning Message

When you see thisflashing symbol, theengine oil temperatureis high.

To acknowledge this warning, press either buttonon the outboard switch on the left spoke of thesteering wheel. After you press a button, thewarning will come on every 10 minutes until thetemperature returns to the normal operating range.Driving aggressively or driving on long hills cancause the engine oil temperature to be higher thannormal. If this warning is displayed duringnormal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehiclemay need service. See your dealer for aninspection. See Engine Oil on page 346 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Warning Message

When you see thisflashing symbol, one ormore of the vehicle’stires is either underor over-inflated.

To acknowledge this warning, press either buttonon the outboard switch on the left spoke of thesteering wheel. There are three levels of warningfor this display:

1. High Tire Pressure (above 42 psi (290 kPa))

2. Low Tire Pressure (below 25 psi (170 kPa))

3. Flat Tire (below 5 psi (35 kPa))


For conditions 1 and 2, this warning will flash fivetimes and the display will then show the tirepressure gage. For condition 3, this warning willflash continuously until the driver acknowledges it.In any of the three cases, the warning willredisplay every 10 minutes until the situation iscorrected. Conditions 2 and 3 will also display awarning light elsewhere on the cluster that will stayon after this warning is acknowledged. See TirePressure Light (CTS-V Only) on page 201 for moreinformation. Also see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 405 for more information on tirepressure specifications.

One-to-Four Shift Message(CTS-V Only)

This message indicatesthat you can only shiftfrom FIRST (1) toFOURTH (4) instead ofFIRST (1) toSECOND (2).

You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) toturn off this feature. This helps you get thebest possible fuel economy.

After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshiftto a lower gear if you prefer.

See Manual Transmission Operation on page 122for more information.

Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gearexcept FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFTmessage comes on may damage thetransmission. Shift only from FIRST (1) toFOURTH (4) when the light comes on.


Driver Information Center (DIC)The DIC gives you the status of many of yourvehicle’s systems. It is also used to display driverpersonalization features and warning/statusmessages. All messages will appear on the audiosystem display.

If your vehicle has the Base audio system, use theinformation contained in this manual forinstructions on operating the DIC for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the Navigation system, seethe Navigation system manual for instructions onoperating the DIC for your vehicle.

System Controls

Use the following controls located on the audiosystem to operate the DIC:

INFO (Information): Press the up or down arrowson this switch, located on the right side of theaudio system, to scroll through the system statusinformation.

CLR (Clear): Press this button, located on theright side of the audio system, to clear DICmessages and to reset some DIC displays to zero.This button is also used to exit out of a menu.


See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228and Status of Vehicle Systems on page 219for more information.

TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: Turn this knob, locatedin the lower right corner of the audio system, toscroll through the menu items displayed. Press thisknob to select themenu item.

Status of Vehicle SystemsYou can view the status of several vehiclesystems using the DIC.

Vehicle Information MenuTo access this menu, press the up or down arrowon the INFO switch located to the right of thedisplay.The following items are available when the ignitionis in ON. These items will not be available whenthe ignition is in ACCESSORY. The tire pressuremenu items are only available if your vehiclehas the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system:• OUTSIDE TEMP• MI TRIP A (KM TRIP A)*• MI TRIP B (KM TRIP B)*

• MILES RANGE (KM RANGE)

• MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG)*

• MPG INST (L/100 KM INST)

• GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)*

• AVG MPH (AVG KM/H)*

• TIMER*

• BATTERY VOLTS

• ENGINE OIL LIFE*

• TRANS FLUID LIFE*(Automatic Transmission Only)

• PSI LF TIRE (KPA LF TIRE)

• PSI RF TIRE (KPA RF TIRE)

• PSI RR TIRE (KPA RR TIRE)

• PSI LR TIRE (KPA LR TIRE)

• BLANK LINE*These items can be reset. Each one must bereset individually. For a detailed description of themenu items and how to reset them, see “VehicleInformation Menu Item Descriptions” later inthis section.You can view any of these items at any time, butonly one item can be displayed at a time.


Vehicle Information Menu ItemDescriptionsThe following paragraphs contain a more detaileddescription of each menu item:

OUTSIDE TEMP: If you select this item, thecurrent outside temperature is displayed at the topof the screen. It will be in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) dependingupon whether the system is set for English ormetric units. If you wish to change the units, seeDIC Main Menu on page 224.

MI TRIP A and B (KM TRIP A and B): Forinformation on the trip odometers, see TripOdometers on page 191.

MILES RANGE (KM RANGE): If you select thisitem, the approximate number of remainingmiles or kilometers you can drive without refuelingis displayed. This estimate is based on thecurrent driving conditions and will change if thedriving conditions change. For example, if you aredriving in traffic making frequent stops, thedisplay may read one number, but if you enter thefreeway, the number may change even thoughyou still have the same amount of gas in the gastank. This is because different driving conditionsproduce different fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces better fuel economy thancity driving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Lowmessage will be displayed. See “Fuel LevelLow” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 228 for more information.


MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG): If you select thisitem, the approximate average miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)is displayed. This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded sincethe last time this menu item was reset.

To reset the MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG), pressthe CLR button located to the right of the screen.The display will return to zero.

MPG INST (L/100 KM INST): If you select thisitem, the current fuel economy is displayed.This number reflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now and will changefrequently as driving conditions change. Unlikeaverage fuel economy, this menu item cannotbe reset.

GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED): If you selectthis item, the number of gallons or liters of fuelused since the last reset of this menu itemis displayed.

To reset GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED), pressthe CLR button located to the right of the screen.The display will return to zero.

AVG MPH (AVG KM/H): If you select this item,the average speed of the vehicle is displayedin miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this menu item.

To reset AVG MPH (AVG KM/H), press the CLRbutton located to the right of the screen. Thedisplay will return to zero.

TIMER: If you select this item, a timing feature isdisplayed. The timer functions like a stopwatchin that you can record the time it takes totravel from one point to another.

To turn on the timer, press the CLR button locatedto the right of the screen once. The display willread 00:00:00 TIMER ON and begin counting.

To turn off the timer, press the CLR button again.When the timer is off, the display will show thetimer value and TIMER OFF. The timing featurewill stop.

To reset the timer, turn off the timer and thenpress and hold the CLR button. The display willreturn to zero.


BATTERY VOLTS: If you select this item, thecurrent battery voltage is displayed. If the voltageis in the normal range, the display will haveOK after it. For example, the display may read13.2 BATTERY VOLTS OK.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, there are four possible DIC messages thatmay be displayed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 228 for more information.

ENGINE OIL LIFE: If you select this item, thepercentage of remaining oil life is displayed.If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display,that means that 99% of the current oil life remains.

When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oilmessage will appear on the display. See yourdealer for service. In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 463 and Engine Oil onpage 346 for more information.

When you reset the Change Engine Oil message byclearing it from the display, you still must reset theengine oil life system separately. For moreinformation on resetting the engine oil life system,see “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System andthe Oil Life Indicator” under Engine Oil Life Systemon page 350. If you clear the Change Engine Oilmessage from the display, it will not re-appear.

TRANS FLUID LIFE (Automatic Transmission): Ifyou select this item, the percentage of remainingtransmission fluid life is displayed. If you see99% TRANS FLUID LIFE on the display, thatmeans that 99% of the current transmission fluidlife remains.

When the transmission fluid life is depleted, theChange Trans Fluid message will appear on thedisplay. You should change the transmission fluidas soon as possible. Be sure to keep a writtenrecord of the mileage and date of the fluid changeso you will have it for future reference. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 463 andRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474for more information.


When you reset the Change Trans Fluid messageby clearing it from the display, you still must resetthe transmission fluid life monitor separately. Formore information on resetting the transmission fluidlife monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid onpage 353.

LF TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s sidefront tire pressure will be displayed. If the tirepressure is low, LOW will be displayed with thisitem. The pressure can be displayed in pounds persquare inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). Tochange the units, see DIC Main Menu on page 224DIC Main Menu.

RF TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’sside front tire pressure will be displayed. If thetire pressure is low, LOW will be displayedwith this item. The pressure can be displayed inpounds per square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA).To change the units, see DIC Main Menu onpage 224 DIC Main Menu.

RR TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’sside rear tire pressure will be displayed. If thetire pressure is low, LOW will be displayedwith this item. The pressure can be displayed inpounds per square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA).To change the units, see DIC Main Menu onpage 224 DIC Main Menu.

LR TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s siderear tire pressure will be displayed. If the tirepressure is low, LOW will be displayed with thisitem. The pressure can be displayed in pounds persquare inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). Tochange the units, see DIC Main Menu on page 224DIC Main Menu.

BLANK LINE: If you select this item, nothing isdisplayed at the top of the screen.


DIC Main Menu

Accessing the DIC Main MenuTo access the main menu of the DIC, do thefollowing:

1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn theradio on.

2. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once.

3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to scroll through themenu items.

The DIC main menu consists of the followingmenu items:

• e BASS - MID - TREBLE

• e EQ

• DSP (Bose® Audio System)

• AVC (Bose® Audio System)

• H/A

• AUTOSTORE PRESETS

• CAT

• TA

• MSG RECALL RDS MESSAGE

• AF

• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT

• 9 (English/Metric Units)

• TCS

• 8 (Clock)

• 8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display)

• SETUP

DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions

e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: Thismenu item allows you to adjust the levels for thebass, midrange, treble, balance, and fade featuresof the audio system. For more information, see“Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)” and “Adjusting theSpeakers (Balance/Fade)” under Radio with CDon page 260.

e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you tochoose among five preset equalizations for theaudio system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radiowith CD on page 260 for more information.


DSP (Digital Signal Processing): If your vehiclehas a Bose® Audio System, this menu itemallows you to select the DSP type that you wanton the audio system. You may choose Normal,Talk, Spacious, Rear Seat, or Driver Seat. Pressthe TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through thesechoices. Once the desired choice is displayed,turn the knob to set your DSP choice and continuescrolling through the main menu.

See “Using DSP” under Radio with CD onpage 260 for more information.

AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): Ifyour vehicle has a Bose® Audio System, this menuitem allows you to turn the AVC feature on andoff. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to turnAVC on and off. When AVC is on, an X will be inthe box next to AVC on the menu. The Xdisappears when AVC is off.

See “AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation)”under Radio with CD on page 260 for moreinformation.

H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menuitem allows you to switch back and forth betweenyour home and away preset radio stations.Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch betweenhome and away.

See “Setting Preset Stations” under Radio with CDon page 260 for more information.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allowsyou to automatically store radio stations withthe strongest signals as presets. See “SettingPreset Stations” under Radio with CD on page 260for more information.

CAT (Category): This menu item allows you toselect radio stations based on preset categories.To turn the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SELknob once. When CAT is on, an X will be inthe box next to CAT on the menu. The Xdisappears when CAT is off.

See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDSand XM™)” under Radio with CD on page 260 formore information.


TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu itemallows you to turn the TA feature on and off.To turn the TA feature on, press the TUNE/SELknob once. When TA is on, an X will be in the boxnext to TA on the menu. The X disappearswhen TA is off.

See “RDS Messages” under Radio with CD onpage 260 for more information.

MSG (Message) RECALL RDS (Radio DataSystem) MESSAGE: This menu item allows youto view an RDS radio station message broadcastby a radio station. To view the message, press theTUNE/SEL knob once. The message will appearon the screen.

See “RDS Messages” under Radio with CD onpage 260 for more information.

AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu itemallows you to turn the AF feature on and off. Toturn on AF, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. WhenAF is on, an X will be in the box next to AF onthe menu. The X disappears when AF is off.

See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDSand XM™)” under Radio with CD on page 260 formore information.

A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructsthe audio system to seek only local radiostations with the strongest signal or to seek allradio stations with a strong signal in a large area.Use LOCAL when you are in urban areaswhere there are several strong radio stationsignals and you want to limit the number ofstations to those with the strongest signals only.Use DISTANT when you are in rural areaswhere there are fewer radio station signalsavailable.

To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, pressthe TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice isdisplayed, turn the knob to set your choice andcontinue scrolling through the main menu.

9 (English/Metric Units): Use this menu itemto adjust the measurement units.

You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS andMETRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, pressthe TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice isdisplayed, turn the knob to set your choice andcontinue scrolling through the main menu.


The measurement units that you choose will bereflected on all the vehicle system displays,not just the DIC information. For example, theclimate control panel will display degrees Celsiusif you choose METRIC UNITS.

TCS (Traction Control System): You can enableor disable the Traction Control System (TCS)using this menu item. Press the TUNE/SEL knobto switch between on and off.

You can also turn the TCS off using the tractioncontrol button located in the glove box (CTS) or onthe steering wheel (CTS-V), or by programmingone of the steering wheel controls (1, 2, 3, or 4) oraudio system soft keys to enable/disable theTCS. See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls(SWC) (CTS) on page 161 and “ConfigurableRadio Display Keys” under Radio with CDon page 260 for more information.

When you disable the TCS, the traction controlsystem warning light on the instrument panelcluster will come on. See Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light on page 199 for moreinformation.

8 (Clock): Use this menu item to set the time onthe clock.

See Setting the Time on page 260 for moreinformation.

8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display): Use thismenu item to toggle between the clock display andthe XM™ Information (Song, Artist, Album), ifavailable.

See Setting the Time on page 260 and “XM™Satellite Radio Service” under Radio with CD onpage 260 for more information.

SETUP: When you select this menu item, thefollowing submenu is available:

• LANGUAGE

• PERSONALIZATION

• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS

• CONFIGURE SWC (Steering WheelControl) KEYS


To change the language displayed on the radio,select LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SELknob. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll throughthe available languages and press the knob tomake your selection. If you accidentally select alanguage that you did not want, ENGLISH isalways at the top of the language list.

For more information on the other items in theSETUP menu, see DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 239 and Reconfigurable Steering WheelControls (SWC) (CTS) on page 161.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages will appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

You must acknowledge a message to clear it fromthe screen for further use. To clear a message,press the CLR button.

Be sure to take any message that appears on thescreen seriously and remember that clearingthe message will only make the messagedisappear, not the problem.

Battery Not ChargingWhen this message appears on the display, thereis a problem with the generator and batterycharging systems. Have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer as soon as possible.

Battery Saver ActiveThis message appears when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system willstart reducing certain features of the vehicle whichyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltageon the DIC by pressing the INFO button untilBATTERY VOLTS appears.


Battery Voltage HighThis message indicates that the electrical chargingsystem is overcharging the battery. When thesystem detects that the battery voltage is aboveapproximately 16 volts, this message will bedisplayed.

To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’saccessories. Turn on the exterior lamps andradio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fanspeed on the highest setting, and turn the rearwindow defogger on.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.You can monitor battery voltage on the DICby pressing the INFO button until BATTERYVOLTS appears.

Battery Voltage LowThis message will appear when the electricalsystem is charging less than 10 volts or ifthe battery has been drained.

If this message appears immediately after startingthe engine, it is possible that the generator canstill recharge the battery. The battery shouldrecharge while driving but may take a few hours todo so. Consider using an auxiliary charger toboost the battery after returning home or to a finaldestination. Make sure you follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

If this message appears while driving or afterstarting your vehicle and stays on, have it checkedby your dealer immediately to determine thecause of this problem.

To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,you can reduce the load on the electrical systemby turning off the accessories.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltageon the DIC by pressing the INFO button untilBATTERY VOLTS appears.


Buckle PassengerThis message reminds you to buckle thepassenger’s seat belt.

This message will display and a chime will soundwhen the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt isbuckled, the passenger’s seat belt is unbuckledwith the passenger airbag enabled, and the vehicleis in motion. You should have the passengerbuckle their seat belt.

The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckledand the passenger is still unbuckled, andthe passenger airbag is enabled. If thepassenger’s seat belt is already buckled, thismessage and chime will not come on.

Buckle Seat BeltThis message reminds you to buckle the driver’sseat belt.

This message will display and a chime will soundwhen the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt isunbuckled, and the vehicle is in motion. Youshould buckle your seat belt.

If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition ison and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will berepeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled,this message and chime will not come on.

This message is an additional reminder to theSafety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panelcluster. See Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 192 for more information.

Change Engine OilThis message indicates that the life of the engineoil has expired and it should be changed andthat your vehicle is due for service. See yourdealer. See Engine Oil on page 346 andScheduled Maintenance on page 463 for moreinformation.

When you reset the Change Engine Oil messageby clearing it from the display, you still mustreset the engine oil life system separately. Formore information on resetting the engine oillife system, see Engine Oil Life System onpage 350. If you clear this message from thedisplay, it will not re-appear.


Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid(Automatic Transmission)This message indicates that the life of thetransmission fluid has expired and it should bechanged. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 463 and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 474 for the proper fluid andchange intervals.

When you reset the Change Trans Fluid messageby clearing it from the display, you still mustreset the transmission fluid life monitor separately.For more information on resetting the transmissionfluid life monitor, see Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 353.

Check Brake FluidThis message will display if the ignition is in ON toinform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.Have the brake system serviced by your dealer assoon as possible. See Brake System WarningLight on page 197 and Brakes on page 372for more information.

Check Gas CapWhen this message appears on the display, thegas cap has not been fully tightened. Youshould recheck the gas cap to ensure that it is onand tightened properly. See “If the Light Is OnSteady” under Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 202 for more information.

Check Tire PressureIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message indicates that one ormore of the vehicle’s tires are low. See Status ofVehicle Systems on page 219 for informationon checking your vehicle’s tire pressures. Also,see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 for moreinformation.

Check Washer FluidWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that your vehicle is low on windshieldwasher fluid. You should refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir as soon as possible. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 370 formore information.


Competitive Driving (CTS-V)When competitive driving mode is turned on withthe TC (traction control) button, this messagewill be displayed on the DIC. The TC light will beon when the competitive driving mode is on.The Traction Control System (TCS) will notoperate while in competitive driving mode. Youshould adjust your driving accordingly. Seethe CTS-V portion of Traction Control System(TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297 for moreinformation.

Driver Door AjarWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that the driver’s door was not closedcompletely. You should make sure that the driver’sdoor is closed completely.

Engine Coolant Hot – AC(Air Conditioning) OffThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor will turn back on. You can continueto drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to the engine ortransmission.


Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speed above normalidling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 360 for more information.

This message will appear when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow thevehicle to idle until it cools down.

Engine Power ReducedThis message informs you that the vehicle isreducing engine power to try to protect the engineor transmission from damage due to extremeoperating conditions. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service as soon aspossible.


Fuel Level LowWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that your vehicle is low on fuel. You shouldrefill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A singlechime will sound when this message is displayed.

Headlamps SuggestedThis message will appear when the amount ofavailable light outside the vehicle is low andthe exterior lamp control is off. This messageinforms the driver that turning on the exterior lampsis recommended even though the daytimerunning lamps (DRL) are still illuminated and it hasbecome dark enough outside to require theheadlamps and/or other exterior lamps.

This message will also appear when thewindshield wipers have been on for more thansix seconds and the exterior lamp control is off orin the parking lamp position.

Ice PossibleThis message appears when the outsidetemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions.

Left Rear Door AjarWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that the driver’s side rear door wasnot closed completely. You should make sure thatthe door is closed completely.

Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 346 for more information.

Passenger Door AjarWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that the passenger’s side front door wasnot closed completely. You should make sure thatthe door is closed completely.


Right Rear Door AjarWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that the passenger’s side rear door was notclosed completely. You should check to makesure that the door is closed completely.

Service AC (Air Conditioning) SystemThis message appears when the electronicsensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Have theclimate control system serviced by your dealerif you notice a drop in heating and air conditioningefficiency.

Service Air BagThere is a problem with the airbag system whenthis message appears. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 192 for more information.

Service Brake AssistThis message will display when a problem withthe panic brake assist system has been detected.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

Service Charging SystemThis message will display when a problem withthe charging system has been detected. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

Service Electrical SystemThis message will display if an electrical problemhas occurred within the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM) or the ignition switch. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

Service Fuel SystemThe Powertrain Control Module (PCM) hasdetected a problem within the fuel system whenthis message appears. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer.

Service Idle ControlA problem with the idle control has occurred whenthis message displays. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.


Service Stability SystemIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willbe displayed if there has been a problemdetected with StabiliTrak®.

If this message comes on while you are driving,pull off the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If this messagestill stays on, or comes back on again while youare driving, your vehicle needs service. Havethe StabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealeras soon as possible. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 299 for more information.

Service Steering SystemYour vehicle may have a speed variable assiststeering system. See Steering on page 300.

This message will be displayed if a problem isdetected with the speed variable assist steeringsystem. When this message is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required to steer the vehicleincreases or feels heavier, but you will still be ableto steer the vehicle.

Service Theft SystemThis message means there is a problem with theimmobilizer. See Immobilizer on page 109 formore information. A fault has been detected in thesystem, which means that the system is disabledand is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicleusually restarts, however, you may want to takeyour vehicle to your dealer before turning offthe engine.

Service Tire Monitor SystemIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message will appear if the TPMsystem is not working properly. Have your vehicleserviced at your dealer as soon as possible.See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405for more information.

Service TransmissionThis message will display if there is a problemwith the transmission of your vehicle. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.


Service Vehicle SoonThis message is displayed when a non-emissionsrelated powertrain malfunction occurs. Haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Stability System EngagedIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willbe displayed any time StabiliTrak® is activelyassisting you with directional control of the vehicle.Slippery road conditions may exist when thismessage is displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. This message may stay on for a fewseconds after StabiliTrak® stops assisting you withdirectional control of the vehicle. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 299 for more information.

Stability System OffIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willbe displayed any time you turn off StabiliTrak®

using the TC (traction control) on/off button. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295or Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) onpage 297 for more information. When this messagehas been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longeravailable to assist you with directional control of thevehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.

Stability System ReadyIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willbe displayed any time you turn StabiliTrak® onagain using the TC (traction control) on/off button.See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) onpage 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)(CTS-V) on page 297 for more information. Whenthis message has been displayed, StabiliTrak®

is ready to assist you with directional control of thevehicle, if needed.

Starting Disabled – Remove KeyThis message will appear when the vehicletheft-deterrent system detects that an improperignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle.Check the ignition key for damage. If it isdamaged, it may need to be replaced. If it is notdamaged, remove the key and try to start thevehicle again. If it still does not start, try anotherignition key or have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

Starting Disabled – Throttle ProblemThis message appears when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.


Theft AttemptedThis message is displayed if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detected a break-inattempt while you were away from your vehicle.

Top Speed – Fuel Cut OffThis message will appear when the EngineControl Module (ECM) detects that the maximumspeed for your vehicle has been reached. Yourvehicle’s top speed is based on the top speedrating of the tires. This ensures that your vehiclestays in a safe operating range for the tires.

Traction EngagedThis message will appear when the TractionControl System (TCS) is actively limiting wheelspin. Slippery road conditions may exist ifthis message is displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. The message will stay on for afew seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheelspin. See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) onpage 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)(CTS-V) on page 297 for more information.

Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle EngineThis message indicates that the transmissionfluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until the transmission cools downor until this message is removed. See alsoTransmission Fluid Hot Message on page 214 formore information.

Trunk OpenWhen this message appears on the display, itmeans that the trunk lid of your vehicle was notclosed completely. You should make sure that thetrunk lid is closed completely.

Turn Signal OnIf you drive your vehicle for more than about1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this messagewill appear as a reminder to turn off the turnsignal. A multiple chime will sound when thismessage is displayed.


DIC Vehicle PersonalizationIf your vehicle has the navigation system, see thenavigation system manual for instructions onoperating the DIC for your vehicle.Your vehicle has personalization that allows you toprogram certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two people. The number of programmablefeatures varies depending upon which model ofthe vehicle is purchased.On all vehicles, features such as climate controlsettings, radio preset settings, exterior lightingat unlock, remote lock and unlock confirmation,and automatic door locks have already beenprogrammed for your convenience.Some vehicles have additional features that canbe programmed including the seat and outsiderearview mirror position.If your vehicle has the ability to program additionalpersonalization features, the driver’s preferencesare recalled by pressing the unlock button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, 1 or 2, orby pressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2,located on the driver’s door. Certain features can beprogrammed not to recall until the key is placed inthe ignition. To change feature preferences, see“Entering the Personalization Menu” following.

Entering the Personalization MenuTo enter the feature programming mode, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start theengine. Make sure an automatic transmissionis in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionhas the parking brake set.To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press theappropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located onthe driver’s door armrest. The DIC displaywill show either Driver 1 or 2 dependingon which button was selected.

3. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn theradio on.

4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access themain menu of the DIC.

5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP ishighlighted.

6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access theSETUP menu.


7. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until the feature youwant to change is highlighted, then press theTUNE/SEL knob to turn the feature on oroff. If the feature is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.If none of the personalization items are turnedon, turn on the personalization menu bypressing the TUNE/SEL knob. The list offeatures will then appear, and you can repeatStep 6.

Personalization FeaturesThe following choices are available forprogramming:

Personalization NameThis feature allows you to type in a name that willappear on the DIC display whenever thecorresponding Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used or one of the buttons on thedriver’s door armrest (1 or 2) is pressed.

If a customized name is not programmed, thesystem will show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2to correspond with the numbers on the back of theRKE transmitters.

To program a name, use the following procedure:

1. Enter the Personalization menu followingthe instructions listed previously.

2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menuitem by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.You will see a cursor on the screen.

3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach thefirst letter you want. The letter will behighlighted. There is a complete alphabet withboth upper and lower case letters and thenumbers zero through nine. Also included arespaces and other non-letter characterssuch as the ampersand (&).

4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select theletter. The letter will then appear on the display.If you make a mistake, press the CLR button.This will exit the menu. You can then goback into the menu and edit the name. Youcan also press the TUNE/SEL knob repeatedlyto cycle through all the characters until youreach the character you wish to change.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name youwant is complete. You can program up to16 characters.


The name you selected is now set. You can eitherexit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle. To programthe next feature, enter the personalizationportion of the SETUP menu following theinstructions listed previously.

Configure Display KeysThis feature allows you to customize the functionsof the four soft keys located to the left and rightof the audio display. See “Configurable RadioDisplay Keys” under Radio with CD on page 260for programming information.

Configure SWC (Steering WheelControls) KeysThis feature allows you to customize the functionsof the four steering wheel controls located onthe left spoke of the steering wheel. SeeReconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls (SWC)(CTS) on page 161 for programming information.

Remote Recall MemoryIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed seat and mirror controls when theunlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF

Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode towhich the vehicle was programmed may havebeen changed since it left the factory.


To program the vehicle to a different mode, usethe following procedure:

1. Enter the personalization portion of theSETUP menu following the instructionslisted previously.

2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTERECALL MEMORY is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back andforth between on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.

If this feature is selected, Remote Exit Recall orKey In Recall Memory cannot be selected.

The mode you selected is now set. You can eitherexit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle.

Remote Exit RecallIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed exit position for the driver’s seatwhen the unlock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE EXITRECALL is highlighted.


If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memorycannot be selected.


Key in Recall MemoryIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed seat and mirror positions when thekey is inserted into the ignition.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFFBefore your vehicle was shipped from the factory,it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode towhich the vehicle was programmed may havebeen changed since it left the factory.


To program the vehicle to a different mode, usethe following procedure:1. Enter the personalization portion of the

SETUP menu following the instructionslisted previously.

2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until KEY INRECALL MEMORY is highlighted.


If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memorycannot be selected.The mode you selected is now set. You can eitherexit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle.

Auto Exit SeatIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed exit position for the driver’s seatwhen the key is removed from the ignition and thedriver’s door is opened.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO EXITSEAT is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back andforth between on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear in the box next to the feature name.


Twilight DelayThis feature allows you to set the amount of timeyou want the exterior lamps to remain on afteryou exit the vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: 0:00 seconds



Mode 4: 1:00 minute

Mode 5: 1:30 minutes




Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode towhich the vehicle was programmed may havebeen changed since the vehicle left the factory.


To determine the mode to which the vehicle isprogrammed or to program the vehicle to adifferent mode, use the following procedure:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TWILIGHTDELAY is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll throughand select the available delay settings.If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps willnot illuminate when you exit the vehicle.Only one mode can be selected at a time.


Lights Flash at UnlockThis feature flashes the exterior lamps when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used tounlock the vehicle. The lamps will flash forapproximately 20 seconds unless a door isopened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY,ON, or START, or the RKE transmitter is used tolock the vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTSFLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted.



Lights Flash at LockThis feature allows the exterior lamps to flashonce when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doorsmust be closed for this feature to work, andthe lamps will not flash if the parking lamps orheadlamps are on.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTSFLASH AT LOCK is highlighted.


You can select this feature by itself, or you cancombine it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that boththe lights flash and the horn chirps when youlock your vehicle.


Horn Sounds at LockThis feature sounds the horn once when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is usedto lock the vehicle. All doors must be closedfor this feature to work.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until HORNSOUNDS AT LOCK is highlighted.


If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash AtLock will also be on. You can choose LightsFlash At Lock by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lockwill always have Lights Flash At Lock enabledwhen it is selected.


Exterior Lights at UnlockThis feature turns on the exterior lamps when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isused to unlock the vehicle. The lamps will remainon for about 20 seconds unless a door isopened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY,ON, or START, or the RKE transmitter is used tolock the vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EXT. LIGHTAT UNLOCK is highlighted.



Driver Unlock in Park(Automatic Transmission Only)The feature allows the driver’s door toautomatically unlock when the transmission isshifted into PARK (P).

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVERUNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.


If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock KeyOut/Off, Doors Unlock Key Out/Off, or DoorsUnlock in Park cannot be selected.


Driver Unlock Key Out AutomaticTransmission Only/Driver Unlock Key Off(Manual Transmission Only)This feature allows the driver’s door toautomatically unlock when the key is removedfrom the ignition on automatic transmissionvehicles or when the ignition is turned to OFF formanual transmission vehicles.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVERUNLOCK KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch betweenon and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.

If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock in Park(automatic transmission), Doors Unlock inPark (automatic transmission), or Doors UnlockKey Out/Off cannot be selected.


Doors Unlock in Park (AutomaticTransmission Only)The feature allows the doors to automaticallyunlock when the transmission is shifted intoPARK (P).

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORSUNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.


If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock KeyOut/Off, Driver Unlock Key Out/Off, or DriverUnlock in Park (automatic transmission) cannot beselected.


Doors Unlock Key Out (AutomaticTransmission Only)/ Doors Unlock Key Off(Manual Transmission Only)This feature allows the doors to automaticallyunlock when the key is removed from the ignitionon automatic transmission vehicles or whenthe ignition is turned to OFF on manualtransmission vehicles.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORSUNLOCK KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch betweenon and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.

If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock in Park(automatic transmission), Driver Unlock inPark (automatic transmission), or Driver UnlockKey Out/Off cannot be selected.


Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of the vehicle’sdoors for up to five seconds after a powerdoor lock switch or the lock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.The five second delay occurs after the last door isclosed.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DELAYEDLOCKING is highlighted.



Lock Passenger WindowThis feature allows you to disable either all thepassenger window switches or the rear passengerwindow switches only. If this feature is turnedon, all passenger window switches will be disabledwhen the window lockout button is pressed. Ifthe feature is off, only the rear passenger windowswitches will be disabled. See Power Windowson page 104 for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LOCK PASSWINDOW is highlighted.



Mirror to Curb in ReverseIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, the passenger’s outside rearview mirrorwill move downward so you can view the curbwhen the shift lever is shifted into REVERSE (R).The mirror will return to the last known drivingposition when the shift lever is moved out ofREVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View AssistMirror on page 136 for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF





2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until MIRROR TOCURB IN REV is highlighted.



Enhanced Chime VolumeThis feature allows you to adjust the volume levelof the vehicle’s warning chimes. The chimevolume cannot be turned off, only adjusted.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: NORMAL

Mode 2: LOUD




2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ENHANCEDCHIME VOLUME is highlighted.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back andforth between the normal and loud settings.



Exiting the Personalization MenuTo exit the personalization portion of the SETUPmenu, press the CLR button once you havefinished making your selections. You will return tothe main audio screen.

If a 15 second time period has elapsed with noselection made, the SETUP menu will beexited automatically.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 288. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.


{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a fargreater access to audio stations and songlistings. Giving extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving cancause a crash and you or others can beinjured or killed. Always keep your eyeson the road and your mind on thedrive — avoid engaging in extendedsearching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 288.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 114 for more information.


Setting the Time1. Press the TUNE/SEL (select) knob to enter

the main menu.

2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCKappears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to selectSET CLOCK.

4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.

5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update thetime. VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appearon the display.

If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP (display) is configuredinto one of the configurable keys, pressing the keywill switch the display between the radio stationfrequency and the time. See “Configurable RadioDisplay Keys” under Radio with CD on page 260 formore information on configuring the keys.

Radio with CD

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CDsimilar


Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and will only workwhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat will cause the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters will appear on thedisplay instead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type(PTY) for current programming, and the name ofthe program being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

CLOCK/INFO DISP (Clock/InformationDisplay): Press the CLOCK/INFO DISP button toswitch between the clock display, the XM™screen, and the XM™ information display.


Press this button while in XM™ mode to retrievethree different categories of information relatedto the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,and Category. To view this information, performthe following:

1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter themain menu.

2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFODISP appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to selectCLOCK/INFO DISP. The display will changeto show the additional XM™ information.

4. To return to the original display, press theCLR (clear) button or wait for the display totime out.

If the CLOCK/INFO DISP is configured into one ofthe configurable keys, pressing the key willswitch the display between the radio stationfrequency and the time. See “Configurable RadioDisplay Keys” later in this section for moreinformation.

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation):Available only with the premium Bose® audiosystem. AVC, which utilizes Bose AudioPilot® noisecompensation technology, continuously adjusts theaudio system equalization, to compensate forbackground noise, so that your music alwayssounds the same at the set volume level. Thisfeature is most effective at lower radio volumesettings where background noise can affect howwell you hear the music being played through yourvehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings,where the music is much louder than thebackground noise, there may be little or noadjustments by AVC. To turn AVC on and off,perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOVOLUME COMP. appears on the display.


3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on oroff. An X will appear in the box when AVC isselected on.

4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. Toreturn to the original display, repeatedly pressthe CLR button or wait for the display totime out.

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source,either radio or CD. The CD must be loadedto select the source and to play. CD will appearon the display if a CD is loaded. If a CD isnot loaded the display will not change from theradio source.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM,or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there. SEEK will appear on the display. Thesound will mute while seeking.

The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

Q SCAN R: Press the SCAN button to enterscan mode. SCAN will appear on the display.Press the up arrow to scan to the next station.The radio will go to a station, play for five seconds,then go on to the next station. Press this buttonagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN formore than two seconds until you hear a beepand PSCAN appears on the display. The radio willgo to the first preset station stored on your firmkeys, play for five seconds, then go on to the nextpreset station. Press SCAN again to stopscanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.


LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this featureyou can set the radio to search for local stations orstations that are further away for a largerselection. To set this feature to LOCAL orDISTANT, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCALor SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select eitherLOCAL or DISTANT.


To search for stations, press the SEEK up ordown arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEKwill appear in the display and seek to stationswith strong signals only. If the system is setto DISTANT, D-SEEK will appear in the displayand seek to stations with weak and strong signals.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered firm keys, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, orXM1 or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered firmkeys for two seconds until you hear a beep.The set preset station number will appearon the display above the firm key that it is setto. Whenever that numbered firm key ispressed for less than two seconds, the stationthat was set will return.


5. Repeat the steps for each firm key.To set the preset stations with an equalizationsetting, DSP (digital signal processing) setting,or a program type (PTY) setting, see each ofthese features later in this section. When apreset station is selected, once one of theseadditional settings is selected, the preset stationwill remember each setting and it will remainactive, until the setting is selected off for thatpreset station.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the presetstations automatically, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.


4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTOREPRESETS appears on the display.

5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select.AUTOSTORE will appear on the display. Theradio will automatically search the bandand select and store the six radio stationswith the strongest signal. The stations will bestored by signal strength, not sequentialorder. The set preset station numberwill appear on the display above the firm keythat it is set to. Whenever that numberedfirm key is pressed for less than two seconds,the station that was set will return.


When battery power is removed and later applied,you will not have to reset your radio presets.


PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives youthe ability to store two different kinds of stationpresets. HOME can be used for stations availablewhere you live and AWAY can be for stationsavailable outside of your local broadcasting area.To set preset stations for home and awayperform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETSHOME/AWAY appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. HOMEor AWAY will appear on the display.


Follow the manual or automatic steps previouslylisted for setting the preset firm keys for both homeand away.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, performthe following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob untilBASS-MID-TREBLE appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tonesettings.

4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll throughthe settings.

5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or todecrease the bass, midrange, or treble. If astation is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set theadjustment.

7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. Toreturn to the original display repeatedly pressthe CLR button or wait for the display totime out.


AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you toselect customized equalization settings. To choosean equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5),perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZERappears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set theequalization setting. The equalization settingwill appear on the display.


The equalization settings are preset toEQ0 (Normal), EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock),EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk), and EQ5 (Country).

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)To adjust the balance or fade, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob untilBASS-MID-TREBLE appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tonesettings.

4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll toBALANCE or FADER.

5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust theBALANCE to the right or the left speakers andthe FADER to the front or the rear speakers.

6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set theadjustment.


EQ0 will not appear on the display when inthis mode.


Using Digital Signal Processing (DSP)Available only with the premium Bose® audiosystem, this feature is used to provide a choice offive different listening experiences: DSP normal,talk, spacious, rear seat, and driver seat. DSP canbe used while listening to the radio or the CDplayer. The radio keeps separate DSP settings foreach band, preset, and source. To select aDSP choice, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the fivesettings appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSPsetting.


DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the bestoverall audio performance for all passengers. DSPNORMAL will not appear on the display when inthis mode.

TALK: This setting should be used when listeningto non-musical material such as news, talkshows, sports broadcasts, and books on tape.Talk makes spoken words sound very clear.

SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make thelistening space seem larger.

REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio togive the rear seat passenger(s) the best possiblesound quality. Sound quality for the front seatpassengers may be different when this settingis used.

DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio togive the driver the best possible sound quality.Sound quality for the front and rear seatpassenger(s) may be different when this settingis used.


RDS MessagesThe RDS message feature is available only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information. SeeRadio Data System (RDS) for more informationearlier in this section.

ALERT: Alert warns of local and nationalemergencies. When, an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station or a relatednetwork station, ALERT will appear on the display.You will hear the announcement, even if thevolume is low or a CD is playing. If a CDis playing, play will stop during the announcement.Alert announcements cannot be turned off. Ifthe radio tunes to a related network station for theannouncement, it will return to the originalstation when the announcement is finished.

ALERT will not be affected by tests of theemergency broadcast system. This feature is notsupported by all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has amessage, MSG will appear on the display. Themessage may display the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc. If the entire messagedoes not appear on the display, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds until themessage is completed. Once the completedmessage has been displayed, MSG will disappearfrom the display until another new message isreceived.

To display the last message, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFODISP appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message willappear on the display.

Once the message has been displayed, MSG willdisappear from the display until another newmessage is received.


TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on thedisplay when the radio detects a signal from anRDS station that has traffic announcementbroadcast capability.

TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears onthe display, the tuned radio station broadcaststraffic announcements and when a trafficannouncement comes on the tuned station youwill hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, when TA is turned on it will seekto a station that does. When a station thatbroadcasts traffic announcements is found, theradio will stop seeking and TA will appear on thedisplay. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, No Traffic will appear onthe display.

The radio will play traffic announcements if thevolume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of aCD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFICANNOUNCE appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON orOFF. An X will appear in the box when TA isselected on.


Activating Category (CAT) Stations(RDS and XM™)CAT allows you to search for stations with specifictypes of music. The selectable categories arePOP, EASY, TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS(Classical), and JAZZ.


To activate program types, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CATEGORYappears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON orOFF. An X will appear in the box when CATis selected on.


Once CAT is activated the categories will appearon the display above the firm keys, in place ofthe preset stations, if programmed. Press the firmkey for the category that you would like tolisten to. Not all stations support CAT. The radiomay not go to all of the stations with thatmusic type when pressing the firm key.

AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station withthe same category.

To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATEFREQ. appears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in thebox when AF is selected on.


This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.


Radio Message

THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 279 later in thissection for further detail.

Using the Single CD PlayerInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radioare on the CD will begin playing. A CD may beloaded with the radio off but it will not start playinguntil the radio is on.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it will stay in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on thedisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 285 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

When a CD is inserted the CD functions willappear on the display above the firm keys, in placeof the preset stations (if programmed).

F1 PREV (Previous): Press this firm key to go tothe previous track. Press and hold this firm keyto reverse quickly within a track. Release the firmkey to play the passage. The elapsed time ofthe track will appear on the display.

F2 NEXT: Press this firm key to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold this firm key to advancequickly within a track. Release the firm key to playthe passage. The elapsed time of the track willappear on the display.

F3 RDM (Random): Press this firm key to listento the tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RANDOM will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOMwill disappear from the display.

F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this firm key to hear atrack over again. REPEAT will appear on thedisplay. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.REPEAT will disappear from the display.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to displaythe time of the track. Press this firm key againto remove the time of the track from the display.

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrowto go to the next or to the previous track onthe CD.

Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to eachtrack for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track,play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.Press this button again to stop scanning.

X (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD whenit is playing or to eject a CD when it is notplaying. Eject may be activated with the ignitionand the radio off.


Using the Six-Disc CD ChangerThe CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 285 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

When a CD is inserted the CD functions willappear on the display above the firm keys, in placeof the preset stations, if programmed.

LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player will hold up tosix CDs.


To insert one CD, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and release the LOAD button. PleaseWait will appear on the display.

3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on thedisplay, insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on thedisplay, the number of the CD and the tracknumber will appear on the display if the radiois on.

If the radio is on, the CD will begin to playautomatically.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds. Please Wait will appear on thedisplay and you will hear a beep.

3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on thedisplay, insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.Do not try to load two CDs at one timeand wait to load a CD until INSERT appearson the display for each disc inserted. TheCD player will take up to six CDs. Do not tryto load more than six. If you want to loadless than six CDs, load the desired amount.The CD player will time out when it doesnot receive any more CDs and the last CDloaded will begin to play.

If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin toplay automatically.

F1 CD n (Down): Press this firm key to go tothe previous CD.

F2 CD m (Up): Press this firm key to go to thenext CD.

CD REV { (Reverse): Press this firm key to goto the previous track. Press and hold this firmkey to reverse quickly within the track. Release thefirm key to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track will appear on the display.


CD FWD | (Forward): Press this firm key to goto the next track. Press and hold this firm keyto advance quickly within the track. Release thefirm key to play the passage. The elapsed time ofthe track will appear on the display.

F5 MODE: Press this firm key to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD(Repeat CD), RDM TRK (Random Track),and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).

• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play ofthe CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on thedisplay when in this mode.

• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats thetrack over again. RPT TRCK will appear on thedisplay. Press the MODE firm key again toturn off repeat play. RPT TRCK will disappearfrom the display.

• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD overagain. RPT DISC will appear on the display.Press the MODE firm key again to turnoff repeat play. RPT DISC will disappear fromthe display.

• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the trackson the current CD in random, rather thansequential, order. RDM TRK will appear on thedisplay. Press the MODE firm key again toturn off random play. RDM TRK will disappearfrom the display.

• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of theCDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM ALL will appear on the display.Press the MODE firm key again to turnoff random play. RDM ALL will disappear fromthe display.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to displaythe time of the track. Press this firm key againto display CD PLAY and press this firm key oncemore to clear the display.

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to goto the next or to the previous track on the CD.

Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to eachtrack for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track,play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.Press this button again to stop scanning.


X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD thatis currently playing, or press and hold thisbutton to eject all of the CDs loaded. You will heara beep. Eject may be activated with the ignitionor radio off.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• If it is very hot. When the temperature returnsto normal, the CD should play.

• If you are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your GM dealer when reporting theproblem.


Configurable Radio Display KeysThis feature allows you to customize the four keysthat are located on each side of the radiodisplay to make it easier to adjust the radiofeatures. Other non-radio related features are alsoavailable for customization.

To program the configurable radio display keys,perform the following steps:


2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUPappears on the display.

3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter intoSETUP.

4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGUREDISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.

5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter intoCONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.

6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which ofthe four configurable keys you would like tochange. The currently assigned feature will beshown.

7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select theconfigurable key to change.

8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the featurethat you would like to store to the key.

9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you havefound the feature to be stored. The displaywill update, by showing the symbol ofthe feature that you selected next to theconfigurable key.

10. Repeat the previous steps for eachconfigurable key.

Once a feature is programmed to a key, thefeature will not appear on the display whenprogramming the remaining configurable keys.The configurable keys can be changed at any time.


XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to anotherchannel.

CH Unavl Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.


Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

NotFound No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your GM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.


Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate.If the radio is removed from your vehicle, theoriginal VIN in the radio can be used to trace theradio back to your vehicle.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering WheelControls (CTS)

Some audio functionscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

e (Band/Source): Press this button to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2(if equipped), radio, or CD.

For vehicles with the six-disc CD changer radio: Ifnone of the audio sources are loaded, and thisbutton is pressed, NO SOURCE LOADEDwill appear on the display.


g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press this button tosilence the system. Press this button again or turnthe VOL (volume) knob to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, press thisbutton to initiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the Navigation System manual formore information.

See ReconfigurableSteering Wheel Controls(SWC) (CTS) onpage 161 for moreinformation onthis feature.

Audio Steering WheelControls (CTS-V)

Depending on your vehicle, the audio steeringwheel controls may be different.

For the CTS-V, some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel. They include thefollowing:

0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.


SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2(if equipped), radio, or CD.

g (OnStar®/Voice Recognition): If your vehiclehas the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-DiscCD audio system, press this button to interact withthe OnStar system.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressthis button to initiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the Navigation System manualfor more information. While in Voice Recognition,say “OnStar” to interact with the OnStar®

system. See the OnStar® System on page 137 inthis manual for more information.

1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radiopreset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek presetstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing, press this button to go tothe next track.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next availableCD, if multiple CDs are loaded.

+u — (Volume): Press this button to increaseor to decrease the volume.

+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go tothe next or the previous radio station and staythere. The radio will only seek stations witha strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to goto the start of the current track, if more than10 seconds have played. Press the plus sign to goto the next track. If either the minus or the plusbutton are pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward throughthe CD.

Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button,until you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward orfast reverse through the CD. Press either buttonagain to play the passage.

If you have the navigation system, some of theaudio steering wheel controls work when a DVD isplaying in the navigation radio. See the NavigationSystem manual for more information.


Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of XM signal for a period of time. Theradio may display No Signl to indicate interference.


Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference withyour vehicle’s radio. This interference mayoccur when making or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery, or simply having thephone on. This interference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating theinternal lens of the CD optics with lubricants.


Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. The metallic film insome tinting materials will interfere withor distort the incoming radio reception. Anydamage caused to your antenna due to metallictinting materials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or otherwarranty.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make surethe cellular telephone antenna does not touch agrid line.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.


Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 288Defensive Driving ...................................... 288Drunken Driving ........................................ 289Control of a Vehicle .................................. 292Braking ...................................................... 292Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 293Braking in Emergencies ............................. 295Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) ........ 295Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) .... 297Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V) ............ 298Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 299StabiliTrak® System ................................... 299Panic Brake Assist .................................... 300Steering .................................................... 300Off-Road Recovery .................................... 303Passing ..................................................... 303Loss of Control .......................................... 305

Competitive Driving ................................... 306Driving at Night ......................................... 306Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 308City Driving ............................................... 310Freeway Driving ........................................ 311Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 312Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 313Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 314Winter Driving ........................................... 316If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 320Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 321Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 321

Towing ........................................................ 326Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 326Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 326Towing a Trailer ........................................ 328

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle


Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.


Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol


According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.


But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.


Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehiclego where you want it to go. They are the brakes,the steering, and the accelerator. All threesystems have to do their work at the places wherethe tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295 orTraction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) onpage 297.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 332.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 197.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.


Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops. Thebrakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot ofheavy braking. If you keep pace with the trafficand allow realistic following distances, youwill eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 198.


Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.


Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction ControlSystem (TCS) (CTS)Your vehicle has a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates onlyif it senses that one or both of the rear wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

This warning light willcome on to let youknow if there isa problem with yourtraction control system.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 199. When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.


The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. Additionally,turning the traction control system off on somesurfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel, willassist vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321for more information. See also Winter Drivingon page 316 for information on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

You can turn the systemoff by pressing the TC(traction control)button located in theglove box.

If you press the TC button once, the tractioncontrol system will turn off and the traction controlsystem warning light will come on. Press the

TC button again to turn the system back on.If you press and hold the TC button forfive seconds, the StabiliTrak® system willturn off. Press the TC button again to turnStabiliTrak® back on. For more information,see StabiliTrak® System on page 299.

You can program your steering wheel controlsand/or the buttons on the Base audio system toturn the TCS on or off. See ReconfigurableSteering Wheel Controls (SWC) (CTS) onpage 161 and/or “Configurable Radio DisplayKeys” under Radio with CD on page 260 forprogramming instructions.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 332 for more information.


Traction ControlSystem (TCS) (CTS-V)Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS)that limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both of the rear wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

This warning light willcome on to let youknow if there’s aproblem with yourtraction control system.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 199. When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. Additionally,turning the traction control system off on somesurfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel, willassist vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 320 for more information. Seealso Winter Driving on page 316 for information onusing TCS when driving in snowy or icyconditions.

You can turn the systemoff by pressing the TC(traction control)button located on thesteering wheel.


If you press the TC button once, the tractioncontrol system will turn off and the TCS warninglight will come on. If you press the TC button againwithin five seconds, the traction control systemwill remain off, the warning light will stay on, andthe stability system will enter CompetitiveDriving Mode. Competitive Driving will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeCompetitive Driving Mode (CTS-V) on page 298and “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in theNavigation Supplement for more information.Press the TC button again to turn the systemback on. If you press and hold the TC button forfive seconds, the StabiliTrak® and Traction Controlsystems will turn off. Press the TC button againto turn StabiliTrak® and Traction Control back on.For more information, see StabiliTrak® Systemon page 299.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 332 for more information.

Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V)The driver can select this optional handlingmode by pressing the Traction Control (TC) buttonon the steering wheel twice within five seconds.COMPETITIVE DRIVING will be displayed inthe DIC. Competitive driving mode allowsthe driver to have control of the power applied tothe rear wheels, while the StabiliTrak® systemhelps steer the vehicle by selective brakeapplication. In competitive mode, the levels atwhich StabiliTrak® is engaged have been modifiedto better suit a performance driving environment.When the traction control warning light is on,the Traction Control System will not be operating.Adjust your driving accordingly.

When you press the TC button again, or turn theignition to ACCESSORY, the TCS will be on.The traction engaged symbol will be displayedtemporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.


Limited-Slip Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, your limited-sliprear axle can give you additional traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standardaxle most of the time, but when one of therear wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with tractionto move the vehicle.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may have an electronic stabilitycontrol system called StabiliTrak®. It is anadvanced computer controlled system that assistsyou with directional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computer sensesa discrepancy between your intended pathand the direction the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressureat any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer thevehicle in the direction which you are steering.

When the system activates, a Stability SystemEngaged message will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 228. You may also hear anoise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This isnormal. Continue to steer the vehicle in thedirection you want it to go.

If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, aService Stability System message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 228. Whenthis message is displayed, the system is notoperational. Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever youstart your vehicle. To help assist you withdirectional control of the vehicle, you shouldalways leave the system on. You can turnStabiliTrak® off if you ever need to through the TC(traction control) on/off button. See TractionControl System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295 orTraction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) onpage 297.


If your vehicle is in cruise control when theStabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may reengagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 168 for more information.

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle has a panic brake assist system thatmonitors the intention of the driver while braking.If the system senses that the driver has appliedhard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the systemwill generate additional pressure, making iteasier for the driver to maintain brake application.When this happens the brake pedal will feeleasier to push. Just hold the brake pedal downfirmly and let the system work for you. Youmay feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise but this is normal. The brakeswill return to normal operation after the brakepedal has been released.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Speed Variable Assist SteeringIf your vehicle has this system, it varies theamount of effort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effort required is less atslower speeds to make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park. At fasterspeeds, the steering effort increases to provide asport-like feel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If your vehicle seems harder to steer than normalwhen parking or driving slowly, there may be aproblem with the system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stiffer than normalat slow speeds. See your dealer for service.


Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.

See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) onpage 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)(CTS-V) on page 297.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.



Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 292. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.


Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle

straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turnthe steering wheel up to one-quarter turn untilthe right front tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn your steering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.


So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass iscoming up, start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and do not get too close.

Time your move so you will be increasingspeed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a running start that more thanmakes up for the distance you would lose bydropping back. And if something happensto cause you to cancel your pass, you needonly slow down and drop back again and waitfor another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as youpull out to pass the slow vehicle. Rememberto glance over your shoulder and checkthe blind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and start your left lanechange signal before moving out of the rightlane to pass. When you are far enough aheadof the passed vehicle to see its front in yourvehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back into theright lane. Remember that your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex. Thevehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.


• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.


If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using your vehiclefor competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitivedriving, the engine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oil levels candamage the engine. Be sure to check the oillevel often during competitive driving and keepthe level at or near the upper mark thatshows the proper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. For information on how toadd oil, see Engine Oil on page 346.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.


• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.


Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do nothave much tread left, you will get even lesstraction. It is always wise to go slower and becautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.


Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.


Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 392.

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.


Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 311.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.


The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.


Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out. Ofcourse, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.


Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.


{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.


Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 392.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.


Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Traction control improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even thoughyour vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, suchas when driving through deep snow and loosegravel, to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)(CTS) on page 295 or Traction Control System(TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297. Also see StabiliTrak®

System on page 299, If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320 and “WinterTires” under Tires on page 392.


The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 293.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.


You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.


You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransmission or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 418.


Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.You should turn the traction control systemoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) onpage 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)(CTS-V) on page 297. Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinningthe wheels as little as possible. Release theaccelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transmissionis in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions, you will causea rocking motion that may free your vehicle. Ifthat does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,it may need to be towed out. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 326.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label, and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.


Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you willfind the label attached below the door lock post(striker). The tire and loading information labelshows the number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label alsoshows the tire size of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires on page 392 andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Example Label


4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed nor intended totow any trailer.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1





750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3


Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached toeither the driver’s door edge or the lower centerpillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This labelshows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certificationlabel also shows the maximum weights forthe front and rear axles, called the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWRor the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.


If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else, they will go asfast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops of theseats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Service on page 488.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towingfollowing.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).


With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 312.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” following for more information.


Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.

2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow vehicle.

3. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatictransmission or in NEUTRAL for a manualtransmission.

4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing a TrailerYour vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow any trailer.


Service ........................................................ 332Accessories and Modifications ................... 332California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 333Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 333Adding Equipment to the

Outside of Your Vehicle ......................... 334Fuel ............................................................. 334

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 334Gasoline Specifications .............................. 335California Fuel ........................................... 336Additives ................................................... 336Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 337Filling the Tank ......................................... 338Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 340

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 340Hood Release ........................................... 341Engine Compartment Overview .................. 342Engine Oil ................................................. 346Engine Oil Life System .............................. 350Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 352Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 353Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 355Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 356

Engine Coolant .......................................... 357Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 360Engine Overheating ................................... 360Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 363Cooling System ......................................... 364Power Steering Fluid ................................. 369Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 370Brakes ...................................................... 372Battery ...................................................... 376Jump Starting ............................................ 377

Rear Axle .................................................... 383Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 384Bulb Replacement ....................................... 387

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 387Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 387Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ............. 388Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................. 388Back-Up and License Plate Lamps ............ 389Replacement Bulbs ................................... 390

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 390

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care


Tires ............................................................ 392Winter Tires .............................................. 393Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 394Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 397Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V) .............................. 400Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 402High-Speed Operation ............................... 404Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 405Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 409When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 411Buying New Tires ...................................... 411Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 414Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 414Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 416Wheel Replacement .................................. 416Tire Chains ............................................... 418Lifting Your Vehicle (CTS-V) ...................... 418If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 422Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) ............... 424Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

(CTS Only) ............................................ 425Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire (CTS Only) ........................... 427

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools(CTS Only) ............................................ 433

Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only) ................ 434Appearance Care ........................................ 435

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 435Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 437Leather ...................................................... 438Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 438Wood Panels ............................................. 439Speaker Covers ........................................ 439Care of Safety Belts .................................. 439Weatherstrips ............................................ 439Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 439Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 440Finish Care ............................................... 440Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 441Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 441Tires ......................................................... 442Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 442Finish Damage .......................................... 442Underbody Maintenance ............................ 443Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 443Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 444



Vehicle Identification .................................. 445Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 445Service Parts Identification Label ............... 445

Electrical System ........................................ 446Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 446Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 446Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 446

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 447Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 447Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 451

Capacities and Specifications .................... 457



ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. Youwill get genuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.


California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 501.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 84.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 478.


Adding Equipment to theOutside of Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN atthe top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 445.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine(VIN Code T), use regular unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If theoctane rating is less than 87, you may noticean audible knocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. Forbest performance or trailer towing, you maychoose to use middle grade 89 octane unleadedgasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,you may notice an audible knocking noise whenyou drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher as soon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, your engine needs service.


If your vehicle has the 6.0L V8 engine(VIN Code U), use premium unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 91 or higher.You may also use regular unleaded gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’sacceleration may be slightly reduced, and you maynotice a slight audible knocking noise, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If the octane isless than 87, you may notice a heavy knockingnoise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 336 for additional information.


California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label. If thisfuel is not available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 202. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additives thatwill help prevent engine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing your emission control systemto work properly. In most cases, you should nothave to add anything to your fuel. However, somegasolines contain only the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicleexperiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is advertised asTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GMdealer has additives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-related problems.


Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. GeneralMotors recommends against the use of suchgasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce thelife of spark plugs and the performance of theemission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.


Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.To open the fuel door, push inward on the forwardedge of the fuel door until the rear edge can bepulled outward.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.


{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 439.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 202.

The Check Gas Cap message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will be displayed if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 228 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 202.


Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease lever withthis symbol onit. It is located insidethe vehicle on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and findthe secondary hood release lever. The leveris located under the front edge of thegrille near the center. Move the release leverto the side and raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.



Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine (2.8L V6 engine similar), you will see the following:


A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 447.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 370.

C. Battery. See Battery on page 376.D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 186.E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under

Engine Cover). See Power Steering Fluid onpage 369.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 346.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 346.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 372.

I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped)(Not Shown). See “When to Check and Whatto Use” under Hydraulic Clutch on page 356.

J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 360 and Cooling System on page 364.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 352.


When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 CTS-V, you will see the following:


A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 447.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 370.

C. Battery. See Battery on page 376.D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 346.E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 186.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add

Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 346.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 369.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 372.

I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir. See “When toCheck and What to Use” under HydraulicClutch on page 356.

J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 360 and Cooling System on page 364.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 352.


Engine Oil

There is an oil pressurelight in the instrumentcluster and an OilPressure Low - StopEngine message onthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the light and/or message appear, it means youneed to check the engine oil level right away.For more information, see “Oil Pressure Low - StopEngine” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 228 and Oil Pressure Light on page 206. Youshould check the engine oil level regularly; thisis an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 342for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.


When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 457.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 342 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Push thedipstick all the way back in when you are through.

V6 Engines

V8 Engine


What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meetingthis standard may be identified as synthetic.However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GMstandard. You should look for and use only anoil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.


Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM4718M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factorywith a Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets allrequirements for your vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M may not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 withthe starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substituteoil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M shouldnot be used for an oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.


Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A change engine oil message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will come on.Change your oil as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your dealer hasGM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.It is also important to check your oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, youmust change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem and the Oil Life IndicatorThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the systemso it can calculate when the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs where you changeyour oil prior to a change engine oil message in theDIC being turned on, reset the system.


After the oil has been changed, the change engineoil message and the oil life indicator must bereset. To reset the message and indicator, useone of the following procedures:

Base Audio SystemPress the CLR button located to the right of theDIC display to acknowledge the change engine oilmessage. This will clear the message from thedisplay and reset it.

To reset the oil life indicator, use thefollowing steps:

1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFObutton located to the right of the DICdisplay to access the DIC menu.

2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item ishighlighted, press and hold the CLR button.The percentage will return to 100, andthe oil life indicator will be reset. Repeat thesteps if the percentage does not return to 100.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the change engine oil message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

Navigation SystemIf you have the navigation system, see “VehicleCustomization” in the Navigation System Manualfor how to reset the oil life indicator.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing of yourused oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a localrecycling center for help.


Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,near the front. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 342 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 463 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Remove the two screws located on the sidesof the cover.

2. Lift the cover off.



3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 476 for the correct part numberfor the filter.

4. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluidlevel. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to yourGM dealer service department and have it repairedas soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 466, andbe sure to use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 474.


How to Reset the Change TransmissionFluid Message and the TransmissionFluid IndicatorAfter the transmission fluid has been changed, theChange Trans Fluid message and the transmissionfluid life indicator must be reset. To reset themessage and indicator, use one of the followingprocedures:

Base Audio SystemPress the CLR (Clear) button located to the rightof the Driver Information Center (DIC) displayto acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS FLUIDmessage. This will clear the message from thedisplay and reset it.

To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, usethe following steps:

1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO(Information) button located to the right ofthe DIC display to access the DIC menu.

2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menuitem is highlighted, press and hold theCLR button.The percentage will return to 100, and thetransmission fluid life indicator will be reset.

3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does notreturn to 100.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, see yourNavigation System Manual for instructions onhow to acknowledge the Change Trans Fluidmessage and reset the transmission fluidlife indicator.


Manual Transmission FluidWhen to Check Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check the manualtransmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leakis the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to your GM dealer servicedepartment and have it repaired as soon aspossible.

How to Check Manual TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be difficult, you maychoose to have this done at your GM dealerservice department.If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false reading.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,the vehicle is parked on a level place and thetransmission is cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the transmission case.

To check the fluid level, do the following:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good and your vehicle is aCTS, replace the gasket and reinstall the fillerplug. If the fluid level is good and yourvehicle is a CTS-V, apply LOCTITE ® #516 orequivalent sealant to the threads and thenreinstall the filler plug.With either vehicle, be sure the plug is fullyseated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluidas described in the next steps.


How to Add Manual Transmission FluidHere is how to add fluid. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 474 to determinewhich type of fluid to use.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to bring the fluid level up tothe bottom of the filler plug hole.

3. If your vehicle is a CTS, replace the gasketand reinstall the filler plug. If your vehicle is aCTS-V, apply LOCTITE ® #516 or equivalentsealant to the threads and then reinstallthe filler plug.Again, with either vehicle, be sure the plug isfully seated.

Hydraulic ClutchIt is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

The hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has thissymbol on it. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 342 forreservoir location.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour clutch master cylinder reservoir and for theproper fluid to use. See Owner Checks andServices on page 469 and Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 474.

How to Check and Add FluidMake sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum)line on the side of the reservoir. If it is not,remove the cap and add the proper fluid until thelevel reaches the MIN line.


Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 360.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection downto −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.


What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than once ortwice a year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 474 for more information.


Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank and pressure cap arelocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle, towardthe rear of the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 342 formore information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of thesurge tank. Follow the arrow from the top ofthe tank down the side to the horizontal mark.


Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 342 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingThere are two engine hot messages that may bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 228 for more information.


If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 363 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 363 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.


If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine warning,along with a low coolant, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Enginewarning, but see or hear no steam, the problemmay not be too serious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hotwhen you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Enginewarning with no sign of steam, try this for a minuteor so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highest heatsetting and fan speed and open the windows,as necessary.

If you no longer have the Engine Coolant Hot − IdleEngine warning, you can drive. Just to be safe,drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warningdoes not come back on, you can drive normally.


If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis operating mode allows your vehicle to bedriven to a safe place in an emergency. Should anhot engine condition exist, an overheat protectionmode which alternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. In this mode,you will notice a loss in power and engineperformance. Driving extended miles (km) and/ortowing a trailer in the overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss and change the oil. See Engine Oil onpage 346.


Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant levelshould be at or above the FULL COLD/FROID lineon the side of the coolant surge tank. If theengine is cold, the coolant level should be nearthe FULL COLD/FROID line on the side ofthe coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

3.6L V6 Engine shown, 2.8L V6 and 6.0L V8Engines similar


{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine hot light is on, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 363 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.


How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the coolantsurge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 357 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.


{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one-quarter turn and then stop.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.


2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to slightly above the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the coolantsurge tank.


4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Theupper radiator hose is the top hose comingout of the radiator, on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. Watch out for the enginecooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the level reachesthe FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of thecoolant surge tank.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Recheck the coolant level in the bottle, the nexttime you use your vehicle to insure the system isfull when cold. See Engine Coolant on page 357.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 342 for thelocation of the powersteering fluid reservoir.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.


How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.


Adding Washer FluidThe CHECK WASHER FLUID message willappear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 228 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 342for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.


Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 342 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you addfluid when your linings are worn, then you will havetoo much fluid when you get new brake linings. Youshould add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spillon the engine. The fluid will burn if theengine is hot enough. You or others couldbe burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

If the ignition is in ON and the brake fluid is low,the “Check Brake Fluid” message will be displayedin the DIC. See “Check Brake Fluid Message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228.When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 197.


What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluidis recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid isalso compatible with your vehicle’s brake systemparts. However, if you choose to use DOT-4fluid, it is recommended that you flush your brakehydraulic system and refill it with new DOT-4fluid at a regular maintenance service everytwo years. See Additional Required Services onpage 466. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 474.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 439.


Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.


Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.


BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 342 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 377 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

After a power loss, such as disconnecting thebattery or removing the maxi fuses in the powerdistribution fuse block, the following steps mustbe performed to calibrate the electronic throttlecontrol. If this is not done, the engine will not runproperly.

1. Turn the ignition key to ON. Do not start theengine.

2. Leave the ignition in ON for at least threeminutes so that the electronic throttlecontrol will cycle and re-learn its homeposition.

3. Turn the ignition to OFF.

4. Start and run the engine for at least30 seconds.


Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.


Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysturn off your radio and other accessories whenjump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations of theother vehicle, as well as the positive (+)terminal location on your vehicle’s battery.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 342 for more information on the locationof the battery.


Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) groundlocation, as shown in the illustration. It islocated between the battery and the underhoodfuse block. You should always use this remoteground location, instead of the terminal on thebattery.

Notice: If you connect a negative cable to theECM, ECM mounting bracket, or any cablesthat attach to the ECM bracket, you maydamage the ECM. Always attach the negativecable to your vehicle’s remote negative groundlocation, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.


{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water. Youdo not need to add water to the batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.


6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative terminal of the good battery. Usea remote negative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remotenegative (−) ground location is for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal


Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 474.


Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may also mean the vertical aim needs tobe adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aimthe headlamps as described in the followingprocedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared asfollows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• The spare tire is in its original location in thevehicle.


Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 341 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to theaim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width ofthe vehicle at the wall where it was markedit Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front ofthe headlamp not being aimed. This shouldallow only the beam of light from the headlampbeing aimed to be seen on the flat surface.


7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm hex socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tapeline. If you turn it clockwise, it will raise thebeam and if you turn it counterclockwise, it willlower the beam.The top edge of the cut-off should bepositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

Passenger’s Side Shown


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 390.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer or aqualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.


Front Turn Signal and Fog LampsA. Turn Signal LampB. Fog Lamp

To replace a turn signal or fog lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the protection shield located on theunderside of the front of the vehicle by pullingout the push-pins located on the undersideof the protection shield.

2. Reach up behind the front bumper area fromunder the vehicle to access the lamp housing.

3. Remove the bulb socket from the housing byturning the bulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulbby lifting the two plastic clips.

5. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keepingthe bulb straight as you pull it out.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lampassembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Sidemarker Lamps

A. Taillamps andStoplamps

B. Turn Signal LampC. Sidemarker Lamp


1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 formore information.

2. Remove the compact spare tire cover byturning the wing nut counterclockwise.

3. Remove the four convenience net wing nuts.

4. Pull the carpet back away from the bodyof the vehicle on the side with the burnedout bulb.

5. Remove the two mounting screws from thelamp assembly.

6. Pull out the lamp assembly to expose the bulbsockets.

7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise and pull the bulb socketout of the lamp reflector.




Back-Up and License Plate Lamps

A. Back-Up LampsB. License Plate Lamps

To replace a back-up or license plate bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 formore information.

2. Remove the cloth cover on the trunk lid bypulling out the three push-pins located onthe underside of the trunk lid.

3. Remove the eight mounting nuts from theunderside of the trunk lid by turning thenuts counterclockwise.


4. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicleto expose the bulb sockets.

5. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise and pull the bulb and socketout of the lamp reflector.




Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up, Front/Rear Turn Signal,Stoplamp and Taillamp

3157K

Fog Lamp 9145License Plate Lamp W5WLLRear Sidemarker Lamp W5WLL

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Owner Checks and Serviceson page 469.

It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.For proper windshield wiper blade length andtype, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 476.

To replace the wiper blade assembly, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.

2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn themoff again when the wipers are in the out-wipeposition. The driver’s side blade will bestraight up and down on the windshield.

3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away fromthe windshield.


4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in aT-shaped position. You should be able tosee a tab.

5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiperblade assembly down far enough to release itfrom the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.Slide the assembly away from the arm.Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damagethat occurs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

6. Replace the blade with a new one.

7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by slidingit over the wiper arm to engage the J-hookedend. Pull up on the assembly to lock it intoplace.

8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.


TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 321.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 402.

• Overinflated tires are more likelyto be cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 404 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.


Notice: If your vehicle has 245/45R18,P245/45ZR18 or P225/50R18 size tires, theyare classified as low-profile tires. Low-profiletires are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects or when sliding into a curb. YourGM warranty does not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to the correct inflationpressure and when possible avoid contactwith curbs, potholes and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice coveredroads often, you may want to get winter tires foryour vehicle. All season tires provide good overallperformance on most surfaces but they maynot offer the traction you would like or the samelevel of performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. With wintertires, there may be decreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shorter tread life. Afterswitching to winter tires, be alert for changes invehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also,see Buying New Tires on page 411.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.


Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example


(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 414.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 422.

Compact Spare Tire Example


(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 402.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.


(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.


Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 402.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 321.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 321.


Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 411.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 414.


Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no sparetire and no tire changing equipment. Yourvehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)which will alert you if there is a loss of tire pressurein any of the tires. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 405.

{CAUTION:

When the low tire warning light isdisplayed on the instrument panel cluster,your vehicle’s handling capabilities will bereduced during severe maneuvers. If youdrive too fast, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the low tire warning lightis displayed. Drive cautiously and checkyour tire pressures as soon as you can.

If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on theside of the road to change the tire. You can justkeep on driving. The tire can operate effectivelywith no air pressure for up to 65 miles (105 km) atspeeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter thedistance you drive and the slower the speed, thegreater the chance that the tire will not have to bereplaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides acushion between the road and the wheel. Becauseyou will not have this cushion when driving on adeflated run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes that coulddamage your wheel and require replacement of it.


Some road hazards can damage a tire beyondrepair. This damage could occur even before youhave driven on the tire in a deflated condition.When a tire has been damaged, or if youhave driven any distance on a run-flat tire, checkwith an authorized run-flat tire service centerto determine whether the tire can be repaired orshould be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’srun-flat feature, all replacement tires mustbe self-supporting tires. As soon as possible,contact the nearest authorized GM or run-flatservicing facility for inspection and repair orreplacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flatservicing facility, call Roadside Service. SeeRoadside Service on page 488 for details.

{CAUTION:

Run-flat tires are constructed differentlythan other tires and could explode duringimproper service. You or others could beinjured or killed if you attempt to repair,replace, dismount, or mount a run-flat tire.Let only an authorized run-flat servicecenter repair, replace, dismount, andmount run-flat tires.

The valve stems on your run-flat tires havesensors that are part of the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). These sensors contain batterieswhich are designed to last for 10 years undernormal driving conditions. See your dealer if youever need to have a wheel replaced, or if thesensors ever need replacement.

Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage thetire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors inyour vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage wouldnot be covered by warranty. Do not use liquidsealants in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.


Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s doorlatch. This label lists your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and shows the correct inflationpressures for your tires when they are cold. Therecommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown onthe label, is the minimum amount of air pressureneeded to support your vehicle’s maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 321. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.


When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, if yourvehicle has one. The compact spare should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.


High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additionalstrain on tires. Sustained high-speeddriving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. Youcould have a crash and you or otherscould be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such thata vehicle can be driven at high speeds,make sure the tires are rated for highspeed operation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

The CTS-V high-performance tires, size245/45R18 96V and P245/45ZR18 96W requireinflation pressure adjustment when drivingyour vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) orhigher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure tothe maximum inflation pressure shown on the tiresidewall, or 41 psi (282 kPa), whichever islower. See the example following.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs)350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the coldinflation pressure for high-speed driving at41 psi (282 kPa)

When you end high-speed driving, return the tiresto the cold inflation pressures shown on thetire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.


The high-performance tires, size P225/55R16,P225/50R17 or P2225/50R18 require inflationpressure adjustment when driving your vehicle atspeeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Setthe cold tire inflation pressure to the maximuminflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall,or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is lower. See theexample following.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs)350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the coldinflation pressure for high-speed driving at38 psi (262 kPa)

When you end high-speed driving, return the tiresto the cold inflation pressures shown on thetire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle may have a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). This system uses radio andsensor technology to check tire pressure levels.If your vehicle has this feature, sensors aremounted on each the tire and wheel assembly,except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires andtransmits the tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

If your vehicle has the base audio system, theDriver Information Center (DIC) displays TPMSwarnings and messages on the radio’s displayscreen. See System Controls on page 218and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 foradditional information and details about the DICoperation and displays. If your vehicle hasthe Navigation system, TPMS warnings andmessages are displayed on the message centerscreen, located inside the tachometer. SeeMessage Center (CTS-V) on page 209 forinformation about the message center operationand displays.


If a low tire pressure condition is detected, theTPMS will display the Check Tire Pressuremessage on the DIC or message center and, atthe same time, illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel cluster.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when one ormore of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to the tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

The Tire and Loading Information label shows thesize of your vehicle’s original tires and theirrecommended cold inflation pressures. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 321, for the locationof the tire and loading information label. Alsosee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.

The tire pressure warning light may come on incool weather when the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive. This couldbe an early indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.


Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 409 and Tires on page 392.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

Resetting the TPMS IdentificationCodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more of theTPMS sensors or rotate the tires, the identificationcodes will need to be matched to the new tire andwheel position. The sensors are matched to the tireand wheel positions in the following order: driver’sside front tire, passenger’s side front tire,passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’s side rear tireusing a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your GM dealerfor service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire and wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing tirepressure do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match the first tireand wheel position, and five minutes overallto match all four tire and wheel positions. If it takeslonger than two minutes, to match the first tireand wheel, or more than five minutes to matchall four tire and wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you will need to start over.

The TPM matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with theengine off.

3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, lock and unlock the vehicle’sdoors.

4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the sametime, on the RKE transmitter. A single hornchirp will sound, indicating that the TPMSsystem is ready, and the sensor matchingprocess can begin.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.


6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. Thehorn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds,confirms that the sensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire position. To decreasethe tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage,or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming double hornchirp, for the left rear tire, exit the matchingprocess by turning the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommendedair pressure level as indicated on the tireand loading information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The TPMS will not function properly, if one ormore of the TPMS sensors are missing orinoperable. If your vehicle has a compact sparetire, the spare tire and wheel assembly doesnot contain a TPMS sensor. If you replace one ofthe road tires with the spare, or if the systemdetects a missing or inoperable sensor, theService Tire Monitor System message will bedisplayed on the DIC. If you have replaced a tireand wheel assembly without transferring theTPMS sensors, the error message will bedisplayed. Once you re-install the TPMS sensors,the message should go off. See your GMdealer for service if all TPMS sensors are installedand the error message comes on and stays on.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

If your vehicle has a message center and thesystem detects a missing or inoperable sensor anerror message of several dashes – – – will beshown on the message center display. If you havereplaced a tire and wheel assembly withouttransferring the TPMS sensors, the error messagewill be displayed. Once you re-install the TPMSsensors, the error message should go off.See your GM dealer for service if all TPMSsensors are installed and the error messagecomes on and stays on.


Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:







Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

If your vehicle has P245/45ZR18 96W size tires,GM recommends rotating these tires at 3,000 mile(4 800 km) intervals. These tires are optimizedfor dry traction and handling performance. Treadlife may be 15,000 miles (24 140 km) or lessfor these tires, depending on how and whereyou drive.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourvehicle’s tires as soon as possible and checkwheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires orwheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 411 and Wheel Replacement on page 416 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 463.


When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use thecorrect rotation pattern shown here.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do notinclude it in the tire rotation.After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321, for an example ofthe tire and loading information label andits location on your vehicle.If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) the TPMS sensors will need to bereset and matched to the tire/wheel position. Aspecial TPMS diagnostic tool is used to reset thesensor identification codes. See your dealerfor service.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 457.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire(CTS Only) on page 424.


When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will be followed by a MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 394 for additional information.


The 18-inch performance tires, size245/45R18 96V, used on some vehicles, meetthe General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) rating but the TPC Speccode has not been molded onto the tire’ssidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and youneed to replace them, you can still get these TPCSpec rated tires by asking your GM dealer.Your GM dealer can order these tires by partnumber. This way, your vehicle will continue togive the proper endurance, handling, traction, andride as the original tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as yourvehicle’s original equipment tires may not beavailable for H, V, W, and ZR speed rated tires.If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating,never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle while driving. Ifyou mix tires of different sizes, brands,or types (radial and bias-belted tires) thevehicle may not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types may alsocause damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the correct size, brand, and type oftires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a compact sparetire and wheel assembly. It is all right todrive with your vehicle’s compact sparetire temporarily. It was developed for useon your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire(CTS Only) on page 434.


{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 405.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.


Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 411 andAccessories and Modifications on page 332 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.


While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.


Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.


If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) on page 424for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.


Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash. Use another type oftraction device only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on your vehicleand tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage toyour vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust orremove the device if it is contacting yourvehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Ifyou do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

Lifting Your Vehicle (CTS-V)

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overyou or other people. You and they couldbe badly injured. Find a level place to liftyour vehicle. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Place the shift lever in REVERSE (R)and firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you can put blocks in front ofand behind the wheels. Also see ParkingYour Vehicle (Manual Transmission) onpage 128 and Parking Brake on page 124for additional information.


{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack, you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to place the jack in theproper location before raising the vehicle.

If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, followthe instructions that came with the jack, andbe sure to use the correct lifting points to avoiddamaging your vehicle.

Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. To lift yourvehicle properly, follow the advice in this part.

To help prevent vehicle damage:• Be sure the jack you are using meets the

weight standards for your vehicle and isin good working order.

• Be sure to place a block or pad betweenthe jack and the vehicle.

• Make sure the jack you are using onlycontacts the jacking location lift pointsand is not leaning on any other vehiclecomponents such as the rocker panels, thefloor pan, or the stone guard moldings.

• Lift only in the areas shown in the followingpictures.


Lifting From the FrontThe front lifting points can be accessed fromeither side of your vehicle, behind the front tires.

1. Locate the front lifting points using thediagram shown above and correspondingtriangular-shaped hoisting notches located inthe plastic molding. The front lifting locationis about 14 inches (35.6 cm) from therear edge of the front wheel well.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure thejack is centered on the front lifting point.


Lifting From the RearThe rear lifting points can be accessed from eitherside of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.

1. Locate the rear lifting points using thediagram shown above and correspondingtriangular-shaped hoisting notches located inthe plastic molding. The rear lifting locationis about 7 inches (17.8 cm) from thefront edge of the rear wheel well.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure thejack is centered on the rear lifting point.

See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 333for additional information.


If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. See Tires on page 392. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout”,here are a few tips about what to expect andwhat to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal. Get thevehicle under control by steering the way you wantthe vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy andnoisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to astop — well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a sparetire, see Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) onpage 424. This information shows you how touse your vehicle’s tire changing equipmentand how to change a flat tire safely.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no sparetire and no tire changing equipment. Run-flattires can operate effectively with no air pressurefor a limited distance and speed.


Your vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) which will alert you if there is a loss of tirepressure in any of the tires. These tires performso well without any air pressure that a TirePressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you whenthere is a low tire condition.

{CAUTION:

When the low tire warning light isdisplayed on the instrument panel cluster,your vehicle’s handling capabilities will bereduced during severe maneuvers. If youdrive too fast, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the low tire warning lightis displayed. Drive cautiously and checkyour tire pressures as soon as you can.

See Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V) on page 400 andTire Pressure Monitor System on page 405,for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Special tools and procedures are requiredto service a run-flat tire. If these specialtools and procedures are not used you orothers could be injured and your vehiclecould be damaged. Always be sure theproper tools and procedures, as describedin the service manual, are used.

To order a service manual see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 501.


Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only)If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put an automatic transmission shift

lever in PARK (P), or shift a manualtransmission to FIRST (1) orREVERSE (R).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

Put the wheel blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tire onthe other side, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.


The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools(CTS Only)The equipment you will need is in the trunk.

To gain access to the spare tire and jackingequipment, do the following:

1. Turn the center nuton the compactspare tire covercounterclockwise toremove it. Thenremove the cover.


2. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwiseand remove it. Then remove the jack andwheel wrench.

3. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434 for moreinformation about the compact spare tire.

4. The tools you will be using next include thejack (A) and the wheel wrench (B).


Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire (CTS Only)

1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not removethem yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn thehandle about 180 degrees, then flip the handleback to the starting position. This avoidstaking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.


2. Find the jacking location using the diagramabove and corresponding triangular-shapedhoisting notches located in the plastic molding.The front location (A) is about 14 inches(35.6 cm) from the rear edge of the frontwheel well, and the rear location (B) is about7 inches (17.8 cm) from the front edge ofthe rear wheel well.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.


{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

Notice: If you position the jack under therocker molding and attempt to raise thevehicle, you could break the molding and/orcause other damage to your vehicle. Alwaysposition the jack so that when the jack head israised, it will fit firmly in the notch locatedinboard from the rocker molding.

4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the jack lift head until the jack fitsunder the vehicle.

5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until the slots in the jack head fitinto the metal flange located behind thetriangle on the plastic molding as shown.

6. Put the compact spare tire near you.


7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

8. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.


{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

9. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, and sparewheel.

10. Install the spare tire.

11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel.

12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwisewith your hand until the wheel is held againstthe hub.


13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 457for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 457 forthe wheel nut torque specification.


14. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will note fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (CTS Only)

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After you have put the compact spare tire on yourvehicle, you will need to store the flat tire inyour trunk.

Remove the foam support so that the flat tire willfit in the storage area. Place the flat tire withthe appearance-side face down and store thejack container in the center of the tire. Seethe diagram for more information.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can.


Use the following diagram as a guide for storingthe compact spare tire in the trunk:

A. Compact SpareTire CoverWing Nut

B. Compact SpareTire Cover

C. Plastic Wing NutD. RetainerE. Jack Container

with WheelWrench and Jack

F. Flat Road TireG. Compact

Spare TireH. Foam InsertI. BoltJ. Wheel WrenchK. JackL. Jack Container

Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only)Although the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.


And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheelwith other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.


Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.


Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.


Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so thatthe speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent applicationmay be required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 474.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.


GM-approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 444. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 439.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 444.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.


Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.


Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your GM dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.


Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on your spare tire cover.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.


Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 84.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker. If the wiper motoroverheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stopuntil the motor cools and will then restart.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andpower seats. When the current load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.


Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating. If a fuse blows,see your dealer for service immediately.

If you ever have a problem on the road anddon’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” onethat has the same amperage. Pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout – like the radio or cigarette lighter – anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replaceit as soon as you can.

The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, onelocated in the engine compartment on thepassenger’s side and the other two under therear seat.

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 342 for more information on location.

To access the fuses, push in the two tabs locatedon each side of the fuse block cover. Then liftthe cover off.


Relays UsageLO SPEED

FANRELAY MINI

Low Speed Fan Motor

HI SPEED FANRELAY MINI High Speed Fan Motor

ACCESSORYRELAY MINI Wipe-Wash

S/P FANRELAY MINI Series/Parallel Fan

PARK LAMPRELAY MICRO Parking Lamps

HORN RELAYMICRO Horn

Relays UsageHI BEAM

RELAY MICRO High-Beam Headlamps

DRL RELAYMICRO-OPT Daytime Running Lamps

LO BEAMRELAY/HIDMINI-OPT

Low-Beam Headlamps

HDLP WASHRELAY

MINI-OPTHeadlamp Washer Motor

SPARE Not UsedBLOWER

RELAY MINI Front Blower

FOG LAMPRELAY MICRO Fog Lamps

MAIN RELAYMICRO

Powertrain/Engine ControlModule (ECM)

STARTERRELAY MINI Starter Solenoid

CMP CLURELAY MICRO Compressor Clutch

IGN-1 RELAYMICRO Ignition Switch (ON)


WiringHarnesses Usage

BODY W/H Wiring Harness ConnectionBODY W/H Wiring Harness ConnectionENG W/H Engine Wiring Harness Connection

J Cases Usage

R REAR RRPDB (Passenger’s Side RearPower Distribution Box)

R REAR RRPDB (Passenger’s Side RearPower Distribution Box)

L REAR LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear PowerDistribution Box)

L REAR LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear PowerDistribution Box)

HI FAN High Cooling Fan MotorLO FAN Low Cooling Fan Motor

BLOWER PWM Fan Motor AssemblySTARTER Starter Solenoid

ABS Anti-Lock Brake System

Fuses Usage

RT PARKPassenger’s Side TaillampAssembly, Front Sidemarker andFront Parking Lamp Assembly

HORN Dual Horn AssemblyLT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp

LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

RT LOW BEAM Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

RT HI BEAM Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

TOS Manual Transmission Output SpeedSensor

SPARE Not Used

THEFTECM (Engine Control Module), TCM(Transmission Control Module),PASS-Key® III+ Module

LT PARKDriver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,Front Sidemarker and Front ParkingLamp Assembly

DIMMING Rear License Plate Assembly, DashIntegrated Module (DIM)

DIM/ALDL DIM, ALDL (Assembly LineData Link)

FLASHER Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher ModuleECM Electronic Control Module


Fuses Usage

STRG CTLS Turn Signal Switch, Cruise ControlSwitch

HTR VLV/CLTCH

Clutch Switch (Normal Closed),Clutch Switch (Normal Open),Jumper to Start Relay Coil forAutomatic Transmission

WASH NOZ Driver’s and Passenger’s SideHeated Washer Nozzles

PRE O2/CAMDriver’s & Passenger’s Side OxygenSensors, CAM Phaser, CanisterPurge

TCM/IPCTransmission Control Module,Engine Control Module, InstrumentPanel Cluster

SPARE Not UsedIGN MOD/MAF Mass Airflow SensorELEC PRNDL Electronic PRNDL (Export)

SPARE Not UsedSPARE Not Used

IGN SW Ignition Switch (Power to IGN-3 andCRANK)

VOLT CHECK DIM (Dash Integration Module)

ECM/TCM

TCM (Transmission Control Module),ECM (Engine Control Module), IPC(Instrument Panel Cluster),PASS-Key® III+ Module

WPR MOD Windshield Wiper Module Assembly

Fuses Usage

ODD INJ/COIL Odd Ignition Coils, Fuel Injectors,Odd Injection Coils

COMP CLUTCH Compressor ClutchWPR SW Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

OUTLET Center Console Accessory PowerOutlet

POST 02Driver’s and Passenger’s SideOxygen Sensors, LRPDB (PusherCooling Fan Relay)

I/P OUTLET Instrument Panel Accessory PowerOutlet

CCP Climate ControlEVEN INJ/COIL Even Injection Coils

SPARE Not UsedSPARE Not UsedSPARE Not Used

CircuitBreakers Usage

HDLP WASHC/B-OPT Headlamp Washer Motor

Misc. UsageFUSE PULLER Fuse Puller


Rear Underseat Fuse BlockTo access the rear underseat fuse blocks, you willhave to first remove the rear seat cushion.

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion

Notice: If, when removing or reinstalling therear seat, you do not do it carefully, youcould damage the fuse center. Avoid contactbetween the rear seat and the fuse centerwhenever you remove or reinstall the rear seat.

To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to releasethe front hooks.

2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Slide the cushion out one of the rear doorsand set it aside.

Rear Pass-Through Seat


{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly routedthrough the seat cushion or is twisted willnot provide the protection needed in acrash. If the safety belt has not beenrouted through the seat cushion at all, itwill not be there to work for the nextpassenger. The person sitting in thatposition could be badly injured. Afterreinstalling the seat cushion, alwayscheck to be sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and are not twisted.

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Position the seat cushion so that you canroute the safety belts through the properslots in the seat cushion.

2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under theseatback so the rear-locating guides hook intothe wire loops on the back frame.

Split-Folding Rear Seat


3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearwardand then press down on the seat cushion untilthe seat cushion snaps into place.

4. Push and pull on the seat cushion to makesure it is locked into place.

5. Check to make sure the safety belts areproperly routed and that no portion of anysafety belt is trapped under the seat cushion.

Rear Underseat Fuse Block(Driver’s Side)

The driver’s side rear fuse block is located underthe rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle.The rear seat cushion must be removed to accessthe rear fuse block. See “Removing the RearSeat Cushion” listed previously.

To access the fuse block, push in the two tabslocated at each end of the fuse block cover. Thenlift the cover off.

Fuses UsageSPARE Not UsedSPARE Not UsedAUDIO Radio, OnStar ModuleSPARE Not Used

REAR DR MOD Rear Door ModulesSPARE Not UsedDRIVERDR MOD Driver’s Door Module

BASTaillamps, Center High-MountedStoplamp, Flasher Module, ABSModule, Trailer Lamps

HDLP LEVELING Headlamp Leveling System ChassisSensors (Export Only)

SPARE Not UsedCCP CCP (Climate Control Panel)


Fuses Usage

IGN 3 Heated Seat Modules, Air InletMotor, Shifter Assembly

SPARE Not UsedSPARE Not Used

FUSE PULLER Fuse PullerL FRT HTDSEAT MOD Driver’s Heated Seat Module

MEM/ADAPTSEAT

Driver’s Power Seat Switch, MemorySeat Module

TRUNKDR RELEASE Trunk Release Motor

REVERSELAMP

ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),License Plate Lamp Assembly

SPARE Not UsedPOSITION

LAMPTaillamp Assemblies, Front PositionLamp Assemblies (Export Only)

J Cases UsageAMP Audio Amplifier

PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)

Relays UsageBAS RELAY

MINI Brake Apply Sensor

Relays UsagePUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)L POSITION

RELAY MICRODriver’s Side Position Lamp(Export Only)

TRK DR RELSOL RELAY

MICROTrunk Release Motor

REV LAMPRELAY MICRO

ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),License Plate Lamp Assembly

R POSITIONRELAY MICRO

Passenger’s Side Position Lamp(Export Only)

IGN 3 RELAYMICRO

Heated Seat Modules, Air InletMotor, Shifter Assembly

STANDINGLAMP

RLY MICRO

Control for Position Lamp Relays(Export Only)


SEAT C/B Power Seat Switches, Memory SeatModule

Misc. UsageJOINT

CONNECTOR Joint Connector


Rear Underseat Fuse Block(Passenger’s Side)

The passenger’s side rear fuse block is locatedunder the rear seat on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. The rear seat cushion must be removedto access the rear fuse block. See “Removingthe Rear Seat Cushion” listed previously.

To access the fuse block, push in the two tabslocated at each end of the fuse block cover. Thenlift the cover off.

Fuses UsageTRUNK DIODE Trunk Lamp

POWERSOUNDER

Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor(Export Only)

SPARE Not UsedCANISTER

VENT Canister Vent Solenoid

FUELPUMP MTR Fuel Pump Motor

SPARE Not UsedR FRT HTDSEAT MOD

Passenger’s Side Heated SeatModule

SPARE Not UsedAIR BAG SDM (Sensing Diagnostic Module)

RIM ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),Power Sounder, RIM

ABS Anti-Lock Brake SystemSPARE Not UsedSPARE Not UsedSPARE Not Used

FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller


Fuses UsageINTERIOR

LAMPHush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly

PSGR DR MOD Right Front Passenger Door Module

RIM/IGN SW RIM (Rear Integration Module),Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder

REAR FOGLAMP Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)

SPARE Not Used

TV/VICSTV Tuner Assembly (Export Only),VICS (Vehicle InformationCommunication System) Module

J Cases UsageREAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element

SUNROOFMOD Power Sunroof Module

Relays UsageSPARE Not Used

REAR DEFOGRELAY MINI Rear Window Defogger

SPARE Not UsedREAR FOG

LAMPRLY MICRO

Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)

Relays UsageFUEL PUMP

MOTORRLY MICRO

Fuel Pump Motor

INT LAMPRELAY MICRO

Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly

IGN 1 RELAYMICRO Ignition Switch

SPARE Not Used


DR MODPWR C/B Door Modules

Misc. UsageJOINT

CONNECTOR Joint Connector


Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 474 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

2.8L HFV6 Engine 11.7 qt 11.1 L


6.0L V8 Engine 13.4 qt 12.7 L

Engine Oil with Filter



6.0L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L

Fuel Tank 17.5 gal 66.2 L


ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Transmission (Pan Removal and Replacement)

Automatic 7.4 qt 7.0 L

6-Speed Manual – CTS 1.9 qt 1.8 L

6-Speed Manual – CTS-V 3.7 qt 3.5 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft (140 Y)All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.8L HFV6 T Automatic Manual 0.043 inches (1.1 mm)

3.6L HFV6 7 AutomaticManual 0.043 inches (1.1 mm)

6.0L V8 U Manual 0.040 inches (1.02 mm)

CTS-V Engine DataEngine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio

6.0L V8 (LS2) 400 hp (298 kW) @6000 rpm

395 ft lb (536 Nm) @4400 rpm 6.0 L 10.9:1


Maintenance Schedule ................................ 460Introduction ............................................... 460Maintenance Requirements ........................ 460Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 461Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 461Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 463Additional Required Services ..................... 466Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 467

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 469At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 470At Least Once a Month ............................. 470At Least Once a Year ............................... 471Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 474Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 476Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 477Maintenance Record .................................. 478

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule


Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.


Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.


This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 334.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 463 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 466 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 467 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.


If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 501.

Owner Checks and Services on page 469 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 474 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 476.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the Change Engine Oil message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) comes on,it means that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may not indicatethat vehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®

dealer has GM-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine GM parts andreset the system.


If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 350 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the Change Engine Oil message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if thechange engine oil message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.


Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 346. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 350. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 352. See footnote (n). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 409 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 470.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 352. • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service only).See footnote (h).

• • •

CTS-V Only: Change 6-speed manualtransmission fluid (severe service only).See footnotes (l) and (m).

• • •

CTS-V Only: Change hydraulic clutchfluid (severe service only).See footnote (l).

• • • • • •

CTS-V Only: Change rear axle fluid(severe service only).See footnotes (l) and (m).

• • •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

CTS-V Only: Change brake fluid(severe service only). See footnote (l). • • • • • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (p).

•

If using DOT-4 brake fluid, changebrake fluid at a regular maintenanceservice every two years.See footnote (j).

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.


(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allbody door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,including those for the hood, rear compartment,console door, and any folding seat hardware.More frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as high performance operation.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.


(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 357 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush,and refill brake hydraulic system at a regularmaintenance service (I or II) every two years.This service can be complex; you shouldhave your dealer perform this service. SeeBrakes on page 372.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Addfluid if needed.

(l) Change fluid if the vehicle is used for highperformance operation.

(m) Change fluid whenever the vehicle has beendriven for 3,000 miles (5 000 km) with thetransmission temperature at 290°F (143°C) orhigher without using an auxiliary fluid cooler. SeeMessage Center (CTS-V) on page 209 andTransmission Fluid Hot Message on page 214.

(n) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 474.


At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 346 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 357 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Tires onpage 392 for further details. Check to makesure the spare tire is stored securely. SeeChanging a Flat Tire (CTS Only) on page 424.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 409.


At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 124.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.


Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 124.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignitionshould turn to OFF only when the shift leveris in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in OFF.

• With a manual transmission, the ignitionshould turn to OFF only when the key releasebutton is pressed. The ignition key shouldcome out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.


Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.


Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbol.However, not all synthetic API oilswith the starburst symbol will meetthis GM standard. You shouldlook for and use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.For the proper viscosity, seeEngine Oil on page 346.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 357.


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

HydraulicClutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use onlyGM Part No. U.S. 88958860,in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4brake fluid.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

ManualTransmission

(CTS)

SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

ManualTransmission

(CTS-V)

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.



Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Floor ShiftLinkage

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.With a complete drain and refilladd 4 ounces (118 ml) ofLimited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,in Canada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 383


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).


Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco® PartNumbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines 25728874 A2029C

6.0L V8 Engine 25750701 A1623C

Engine Oil Filter

2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines 25177917 PF2129

6.0L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 25740404 CF133

Spark Plugs

2.8L and 3.6L HFV6 Engines 12597464 41-990

6.0L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985

Wiper Blades (Hook Type)

Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm) 12487636 —

Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm) 12487638 —


Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines

6.0L V8 Engine


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 460.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 469 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




Customer Assistance and Information ....... 482Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 482Online Owner Center ................................. 485Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 486Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 486GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 487Roadside Service ...................................... 488Courtesy Transportation ............................. 491Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders .............................................. 494Collision Damage Repair ........................... 495

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 500Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 500Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 500Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 500Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 501

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information


Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the United States, contact theCadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hoursa day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,contact the Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).This is available from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, please rememberthat your concern will likely be resolved ata dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if you have a concern.


STEP THREE (United States Owners): BothGeneral Motors and your dealer are committedto making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should filewith the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto LineProgram to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.


STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after the following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two.General Motors of Canada Limited wants youto be aware of its participation in a no-chargemediation/Arbitration program. General Motorsof Canada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, from the time you fileyour complaint to the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program atthe following address. Your inquiry shouldbe accompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1–163–0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.


Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who useText Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTYequipment available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

www.Cadillac.com1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112


Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.


Roadside ServiceIn the United States or Canada, call1-800-882-1112

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is morethan an auto club or towing service. It providesevery Cadillac owner with the advantage ofcontacting a Cadillac advisor and, in the UnitedStates, where available, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

Each United States technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehicle complete withthe necessary Cadillac parts and tools required tohandle most roadside repairs.

Who Is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the UnitedStates during the Bumper-to-Bumper warrantyperiod and in Canada, during the Base Warrantycoverage period of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, up to a maximum coverage of $100.These services are provided at a nominal chargeif the Cadillac is no longer covered by thewarranties listed previously. Roadside Service isavailable only in the United States and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several CadillacOwner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughoutyour Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).


Emergency Road Service is performed on site forthe following situations:

• Towing Service: Emergency towing from apublic roadway or highway to the nearestdealership for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrenceswhich require a battery jump start will becovered at no charge.

• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered atno charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. If your vehicle will notstart, Roadside Service will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership. In the United States, replacementkeys made at the customer’s expense willbe delivered within 10 miles.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the United States and10 litres in Canada). Service to provide dieselmay be restricted. For safety reasons,propane and other alternative fuels will not beprovided through this service.

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):Installation of your spare tire, in goodcondition, will be covered at no charge. Thecustomer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warrantyperiod. Items covered are hotel, meals,and rental car.


Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac

Roadside Service will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlightingyour choice of either the most direct route orthe most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Alternative Service: There may be timeswhen Roadside Service cannot provide timelyassistance. Your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and youwill be reimbursed up to $100 upon submissionof the original receipt to Cadillac RoadsideService®.

Roadside Service AvailabilityWherever you drive in the United States orCanada, an advisor is available to assist you overthe phone. A dealer technician, if available, cantravel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km)radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have yourcar towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideService Representative:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, hometelephone number

• Location of your Cadillac and number youare calling from

• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), odometer reading, and date of delivery

While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. In the United States or Canada,customers call Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112.


Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States orCanada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.

Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Service is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Cadillac and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Service programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Servicecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(United States) or Base Warranty Coverageperiod (Canada), provided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty, interim transportation maybe available under the courtesy transportationprogram. Several courtesy transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are requiredto assist in reducing your inconvenience.

Courtesy Transportation is not part of the newVehicle Limited Warranty and is available only atparticipating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.


Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle Service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.


Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs, andpublic transportation is used as “shuttle service,”the reimbursement is limited to the associatedshuttle allowance (contact your dealer) and mustbe supported by original receipts. In addition,in the United States, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expensesmay be available. Claim amounts should reflectactual costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for a warranty repair. Taxi reimbursementmay also be available if you meet the eligibility fora courtesy rental and a rental vehicle is notpractical for your requirements. Rental and taxireimbursement will be limited (contact your dealer)and must be supported by original receipts.

This requires that you sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state/provincial, local andrental vehicle provider requirements. Requirementsvary and may include minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You areresponsible for fuel usage charges and may alsobe responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

Cadillac and General Motors of Canada reservethe right to unilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportation at any timeand to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at their sole discretion.


Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if thevehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),to provide anti-lock braking and to help the drivercontrol the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored only in acrash event by computer systems, such as thosecommonly called Event Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision.

This information has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.


In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.


Recycled original equipment parts may alsobe used for repair. These parts are typicallyremoved from vehicles that were total losses inprior accidents. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sections ofthe vehicle. A recycled original equipmentGM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintainyour vehicle’s originally designed appearanceand safety performance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such parts are notcovered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures are notcovered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.


If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideService on page 488 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.


• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.


Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.


Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us. Please call us at1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169


In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or,write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GM dealeror by calling 1-800-GMDRIVE (1-800-463-7483).This reference number is needed to order theservice bulletin from Helm, Inc.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee


Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing FeeWithout Portfolio: Owner Manual only.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.


AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 332Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 178Additives, Fuel ............................................ 336Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 446Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 352Air Conditioning ........................................... 180Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 194Readiness Light ....................................... 192

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 494

Airbag System ............................................... 68Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 85How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 76Passenger Sensing System ....................... 79Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 84What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 76What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ....................................... 77

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 75Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem .................................................... 286

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 293Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 198Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 441Care of Safety Belts ................................ 439Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 443Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 440Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 435Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 437Finish Care .............................................. 440Finish Damage ......................................... 442Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 438Leather .................................................... 438Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 442


Appearance Care (cont.)Speaker Covers ....................................... 439Tires ........................................................ 442Underbody Maintenance ........................... 443Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 444Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 439Weatherstrips ........................................... 439Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 441Wood Panels ........................................... 439

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 179Audio System(s) .......................................... 258

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ........ 281, 282Care of Your CD Player ........................... 285Care of Your CDs .................................... 285Diversity Antenna System ......................... 286Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 281Radio with CD ......................................... 260Setting the Time ...................................... 260Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 281Understanding Radio Reception ............... 284XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 286

Automatic TransmissionFluid ........................................................ 353Operation ................................................. 118

BBattery ........................................................ 376

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 175Run-Down Protection ............................... 177

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 312Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 293Emergencies ............................................ 295Panic Assist ............................................. 300Parking .................................................... 124System Warning Light .............................. 197

Brakes ........................................................ 372Braking ....................................................... 292Braking in Emergencies ............................... 295Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 111Bulb Replacement ....................................... 387

Back-Up and License Plate Lamps .......... 389Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ............ 388Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 387Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 384High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 387Replacement Bulbs .................................. 390Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................ 388Buying New Tires ........................................ 411


CCalibration ................................................... 133California Fuel ............................................. 336California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 333Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 457Carbon Monoxide .............. 100, 130, 316, 328Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 439Your CD Player ........................................ 285Your CDs ................................................. 285

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 151Chains, Tire ................................................. 418Charging System Light ................................ 196Check

Engine Light ............................................ 202Engine Oil Pressure Message .................. 215

Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 340Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 443Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 45Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 55Older Children ........................................... 42Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 61

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 63Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 179Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 441Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 440Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 437Finish Care .............................................. 440Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 435Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 438Leather .................................................... 438Speaker Covers ....................................... 439Tires ........................................................ 442Underbody Maintenance ........................... 443Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 439Weatherstrips ........................................... 439Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 441Wood Panels ........................................... 439

Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 186Dual ......................................................... 180Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 185Steering Wheel Controls .......................... 187

Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 356


Collision Damage Repair ............................. 495Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 38Compact Spare Tire .................................... 434Compass ..................................................... 133Competitive Driving ..................................... 306Competitive Driving Mode ............................ 298Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 292Convenience Net ......................................... 152Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 200Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 200Heater, Engine ......................................... 116Hot Temperature Warning Message .......... 215Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 360

Cooling System ........................................... 364Cruise Control ............................................. 168Cruise Control Light .................................... 208Cupholder(s) ................................................ 151Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 491Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 486Customer Assistance Offices .................... 486Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 482GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 487Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 500

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 500Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 500Roadside Service ..................................... 488Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 501

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 173Diversity Antenna System ............................ 286Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 333Door

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 97Delayed Locking ........................................ 98Locks ......................................................... 96Power Door Locks ..................................... 97Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 98Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 99

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 218DIC Main Menu ....................................... 224DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 239DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 228


Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.)Status of Vehicle Systems ........................ 219System Controls ....................................... 218

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 306City .......................................................... 310Defensive ................................................. 288Drunken ................................................... 289Freeway ................................................... 311Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 314In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 308Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 321Winter ...................................................... 316

Dual Climate Control System ....................... 180

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 446Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 447Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 446Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 451Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 447Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 446

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 352Battery ..................................................... 376Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 202Check Oil Pressure Message ................... 215Coolant .................................................... 357Coolant Heater ......................................... 116Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 200Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 200Drive Belt Routing .................................... 477Engine Compartment Overview ................ 342Exhaust ................................................... 130Oil ........................................................... 346Oil Life System ........................................ 350Oil Temperature Warning Message ........... 216Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 363Overheating ............................................. 360Speed Limiter .......................................... 191Starting .................................................... 114

Entry Lighting .............................................. 176Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 494Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 41Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 175


FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 352Finish Damage ............................................ 442Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 160Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 164Flat Tire ...................................................... 422Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 424Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 433Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 353Manual Transmission ................................ 355Power Steering ........................................ 369Windshield Washer .................................. 370

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 207Fog Lamps .................................................. 175Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 18Fuel ............................................................ 334

Additives .................................................. 336California Fuel .......................................... 336Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 340Filling Your Tank ...................................... 338Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 337

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 208Gasoline Octane ...................................... 334Gasoline Specifications ............................ 335

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 447Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 451Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 447Windshield Wiper ..................................... 446

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 200Fuel ......................................................... 208Speedometer ........................................... 190Tachometer .............................................. 191

Garage Door Opener .......................... 139, 140Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 334Specifications ........................................... 335

Glove Box ................................................... 151GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 487


HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 160Head Restraints ............................................ 17Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 384Headlamps .................................................. 172

Bulb Replacement .................................... 387Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 173Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 164Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ............ 388Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 387High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 387High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 164On Reminder ........................................... 173Washer .................................................... 167Wiper Activated ........................................ 172

Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 180Highbeam On Light ..................................... 208High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 404Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 313Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 314Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 340Release ................................................... 341

Horn ............................................................ 160Hot Coolant Temperature Warning

Message .................................................. 215How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 356

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 112Immobilizer .................................................. 109Immobilizer Operation .................................. 109Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 45Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 402Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 158Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 176Cluster ..................................................... 189

JJump Starting .............................................. 377


KKeyless Entry System ................................... 92Keys ............................................................. 91

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 394Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 177Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 175Fog .......................................................... 175Reading ................................................... 177

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 55

Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ............................ 418Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 192Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 198Brake System Warning ............................. 197Charging System ..................................... 196Cruise Control .......................................... 208Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 200Fog Lamp ................................................ 207Highbeam On .......................................... 208Lights On Reminder ................................. 207

Light (cont.)Malfunction Indicator ................................ 202Oil Pressure ............................................. 206Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 194Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 192Security ................................................... 207Sport Mode .............................................. 207TCS Warning Light .................................. 199Tire Pressure ........................................... 201Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 199

LightingEntry ........................................................ 176Parade Dimming ...................................... 177

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 299Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 321Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 97Delayed Locking ........................................ 98Door .......................................................... 96Lockout Protection ................................... 100Power Door ............................................... 97Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 98Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 99

Loss of Control ........................................... 305Lumbar

Power Controls .......................................... 10


MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 466At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 470At Least Once a Month ............................ 470At Least Once a Year .............................. 471Introduction .............................................. 460Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 467Maintenance Record ................................ 478Maintenance Requirements ...................... 460Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 476Owner Checks and Services .................... 469Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 474Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 463Using ....................................................... 461Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 461

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 202Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 355Operation ................................................. 122

Map Pocket ................................................. 151Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 11

MessageCenter ..................................................... 209Check Engine Oil Pressure ...................... 215DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 228Hot Coolant Temperature Warning ............ 215Oil Temperature Warning .......................... 216One-to-Four Shift ..................................... 217Tire Pressure Warning ............................. 216Transmission Fluid Hot ............................. 214

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview

with OnStar® ........................................ 132Automatic Dimming Rearview

with OnStar® and Compass .................. 133Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 137Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 136Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 137Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 135

MyGMLink.com ............................................ 485

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 281New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 111Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 476


OOdometer .................................................... 190Odometers, Trip .......................................... 191Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 303Oil

Engine ..................................................... 346Pressure Light .......................................... 206

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 350Oil Temperature Warning Message .............. 216Older Children, Restraints ............................. 42One-to-Four Shift Message .......................... 217Online Owner Center ................................... 485OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 137Other Warning Devices ................................ 160Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 185Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 178Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 137Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 136Heated Mirrors ......................................... 137Power Mirrors .......................................... 135

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 363

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 469Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 442Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 300Parade Dimming .......................................... 177Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 126Shifting Out of ......................................... 128

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 124Over Things That Burn ............................ 129

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 128Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 194Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 186Passenger Sensing System ........................... 79Passing ....................................................... 303Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 178Door Locks ................................................ 97Electrical System ..................................... 446Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 114Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 369Windows .................................................. 104

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 41Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 98


QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 25

RRadios ........................................................ 258

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 285Care of Your CDs .................................... 285Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 281Radio with CD ......................................... 260Setting the Time ...................................... 260Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 281Understanding Reception ......................... 284

Reading Lamps ........................................... 177Rear Axle .................................................... 383

Limited-Slip .............................................. 299Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 99Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 38Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 34Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® ............................................ 132Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 133Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 14Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 474

Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls ...... 161Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 326Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 92Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ..... 93Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 427Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 425Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 390Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 500General Motors ........................................ 500United States Government ....................... 500

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 86Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 87Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 114Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 34Roadside

Service .................................................... 488Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 321Roof Rack Provisions .................................. 152Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 477Run-Flat Tires ............................................. 400Running the Engine While Parked ............... 131


SSafety Belt

Pretensioners ............................................. 41Reminder Light ........................................ 192

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 439Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26Questions and Answers

About Safety Belts .................................. 25Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 38Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 34Right Front Passenger Position .................. 34Safety Belt Extender .................................. 41Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 33Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 463Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 17Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual ........................................................ 8Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 11

Seats (cont.)Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Seats ................................................ 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 14Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 18

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 61Right Front Seat Position ........................... 63

Security Light .............................................. 207Service ........................................................ 332

Accessories and Modifications .................. 332Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 334California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 333Doing Your Own Work ............................. 333Engine Soon Light ................................... 202Publications Ordering Information ............. 501

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 84Setting the Time .......................................... 260Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 442Shift, One-to-Four Message ......................... 217Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 126Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 128Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 163


Spare TireCompact .................................................. 434Installing .................................................. 427Remving .................................................. 425String ....................................................... 433

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 457Speedometer ............................................... 190Sport Mode Light ........................................ 207StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 299Starting Your Engine ................................... 114Status of Vehicle Systems, DIC ................... 219Steering ...................................................... 300Steering Wheel Comfort Controls ................. 187Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ............ 281, 282Steering Wheel, Reconfigurable

Steering Wheel Controls .......................... 161Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 161Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 151Convenience Net ..................................... 152Cupholder(s) ............................................ 151Glove Box ................................................ 151Map Pocket ............................................. 151Roof Rack Provisions ............................... 152

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 320Sun Visors .................................................. 106Sunroof ....................................................... 153System Controls, DIC .................................. 218

TTachometer ................................................. 191Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andSidemarker Lamps ................................ 388

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 199Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 281Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 107

Immobilizer .............................................. 109Immobilizer Operation .............................. 109

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 161Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 201Pressure Warning Message ...................... 216

Tires ........................................................... 392Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ............................................... 441Buying New Tires ..................................... 411Chains ..................................................... 418Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 424Cleaning .................................................. 442Compact Spare Tire ................................. 434Different Size ........................................... 414High-Speed Operation .............................. 404If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 422Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 402


Tires (cont.)Inspection and Rotation ............................ 409Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 427Lifting Your Vehicle .................................. 418Pressure Monitor System ......................... 405Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 427Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 425Run-Flat ................................................... 400Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 433Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 394Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 397Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 414Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 416Wheel Replacement ................................. 416When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 411Winter Tires ............................................. 393

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 326Towing a Trailer ....................................... 328Your Vehicle ............................................. 326

TractionControl System (TCS) ..................... 295, 297Control System Warning Light .................. 199

Traction (cont.)Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 299StabiliTrak® System ................................. 299

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 353Fluid Hot Message ................................... 214Fluid, Manual ........................................... 355

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 118Transmission Operation, Manual .................. 122Trip Odometers ........................................... 191Trunk .......................................................... 100Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 163Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 163

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 284Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 414Universal Home Remote System ........ 139, 140

Operation ........................................ 141, 147


VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 292Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 321Parking Your ............................................ 128Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders .............................. 494

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 445Service Parts Identification Label .............. 445

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 239

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 185Visors .......................................................... 106

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 188Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 228Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 160Other Warning Devices ............................ 160Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 416Different Size ........................................... 414Replacement ............................................ 416

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54Windows ..................................................... 103

Power ...................................................... 104


WindshieldWasher .................................................... 166Washer Fluid ........................................... 370Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 390Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 441Wiper Fuses ............................................ 446Wipers ..................................................... 165

Winter Driving ............................................. 316Winter Tires ................................................. 393Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 172

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 279XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 286

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 461


2007 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M - Dealer...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M - Dealer...